DCP552 Mark ΙΙ
Digital Control Programmer
User’s Manual
EN1I-6187
Issue 5 (12/01)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unpacking
Check the following when removing the DCP552 from its package.
1. Check the model No. to make sure that you have received the product that you ordered.
2. Check the DCP552 for any apparent physical damage.
3. Check the contents of the package against the Package List to make sure that all accessories are included
in the package.
After unpacking, handle the DCP552 and its accessories taking care to prevent damage or loss of parts.
If an inconsistency is found or the package contents are not in order, immediately contact your dealer.
Name
Model No.
Q’ty
1
Remarks
Body
See 1-5, "Model Number
Configuration", on page 1-5.
Mounting bracket
User’s Manual
81446044-001
1
pair
(2)
1
EN1I-6187
This manual
(CP-UM-5025E)
XXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
User
s
Manual
Engineering unit indicator label
Terminal cover
1
1
Power supply terminal cover
81446176-001
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration of This User’s Manual
This manual is organized as follows.
Chapter 1. PRODUCT OUTLINE
This chapter explains the use and features of the DCP552 and provides the basic
function block and product model numbers.
Chapter 2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
This chapter gives the names and functions of parts of the DCP552, and input
type and range number.
Chapter 3. INSTALLATION AND MOUNTINGS
This chapter describes the procedure for mounting the DCP552 onto an operation
console.
We strongly urge persons responsible for device design on the DCP552 read this
chapter.
Chapter 4. WIRING
This chapter describes the wiring procedure and precautions required for installing
the DCP552.
We strongly urge persons responsible for device design and wiring of the
DCP552 read this chapter.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
Chapter 6. OPERATION
This chapter explains detailed functions of the DCP552.
We strongly urge persons responsible for control design on the DCP552 read this
chapter.
This chapter gives the selections of the basic display, program selection, operation,
and other information.
We strongly urge persons responsible for device design and operation on the
DCP552 read this chapter.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
This chapter describes the parameter setting method of the DCP552 and the
meaning of settings.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
This chapter describes the program setting method of the DCP552 and the
meaning of settings.
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATION
This chapter describes how to use memory cards.
Chapter 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes checkpoints and countermeasures when the DCP552 is not
operating normally.
Chapter 11. SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter gives the general specifications, performance specifications and the
external dimensions of the DCP552.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
This chapter describes calibration procedures for the functions of the DCP550.
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Unpacking
Configuration of This User’s Manual
Conventions Used in This Manual
Chapter 1. PRODUCT OUTLINE
1-1 Features• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1-1
1-2 Basic Function Block Diagram • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1-2
1-3 Data Configuration Overview• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1-3
1-4 System Configuration • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1-4
■ CPL communications network-based configuration • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1-4
1-5 Model Number • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1-5
Chapter 2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
2-1 Structure • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-1
2-2 Console • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-2
■ Basic display status • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-2
■ Display • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-2
■ Key pad • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-4
■ Key chord functions • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-6
■ Loader jack• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-7
2-3 Input Type and Range Number • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-8
■ Input• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-8
Chapter 3. INSTALLATION AND MOUNTING
3-1 Before Installation • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3-1
■ Mounting position • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3-1
■ Sources of electrical interference and countermeasures • • • • • • • • • • 3-2
■ Dust proof cover • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3-2
3-2 Installation • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3-3
■ Panel cutout dimension• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3-3
■ Installation procedures • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3-4
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-1 Precautions on Wiring • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-1
4-2 Recommended Cables • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-3
4-3 Making Terminal Connections • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-4
4-4 Terminal Array • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-5
4-5 Power Supply and Grounding • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-6
■ Power supply • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-6
■ Grounding • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-6
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6 PV Input (Analog Input) Connection• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-7
■ PV input CH1 connection• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-7
■ PV input CH2 connection• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-7
4-7 Control Output Connection • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-9
4-8 Auxiliary Output Connection • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-10
■ Auxiliary Output CH1 Connection• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-10
■ Auxiliary Output CH2 Connection• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-10
4-9 Event Output (Open Collector Output) Connection • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-11
4-10 External Switch Input Connection • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-12
4-11 Communication Connection • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-13
■ RS-485 connection • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-13
■ RS-232C connection • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-16
■ Connection to ST221 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-17
4-12 Isolation between Input and Output • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-18
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
5-1 Data • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-1
■ Data types• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-1
5-2 Program Pattern • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-2
■ Pattern • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-2
■ Events • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-5
■ PID group selection • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-16
■ Selection of output limiter group • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-16
■ G.SOAK (Guarantee soak) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-17
■ PV shift • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-18
■ Repeat • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-19
■ PV start• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-20
■ Cycle • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-21
■ Pattern link • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-22
■ Tag • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-23
5-3 Mode • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-24
■ Mode types • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-24
■ Mode transitions • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-26
■ Mode transition operations • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-27
■ Mode transition restrictions • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-28
5-4 Input Process Functions • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-29
■ Model without carbon potential (CP) compensation• • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-29
■ Model with carbon potential (CP) compensation • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-30
■ O2 sensor check (model with CP compensation) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-31
5-5 Output Processing Functions • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-32
■ Control output CH1 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-32
■ Control output CH2 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-34
■ Auxiliary output• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-36
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
6-1 Power Supply On • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6-1
6-2 Basic Display Selection • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6-2
■ Program run mode displays• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6-3
■ Constant value control mode • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6-9
6-3 Selecting Programs• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6-11
■ Selecting program numbers• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6-11
6-4 External Switch Operation• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6-12
■ External switch input • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6-12
■ Selecting programs • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6-13
■ Read timing• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6-15
6-5 Manual Operation and Auto-Tuning • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6-16
■ Manual operation• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6-16
■ Auto-tuning (AT) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6-16
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
7-1 Parameter Setup• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7-1
■ Selecting parameter settings groups • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7-1
■ Progression of individual items in parameter settings• • • • • • • • • • • • 7-1
■ Modifying individual items and exiting the setting mode • • • • • • • • • • 7-2
7-2 Parameter Setting List • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7-4
■ Variable parameter setting• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7-5
■ Detailed information on variable parameters• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7-9
■ Event configuration data settings• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7-12
■ Settings by event type • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7-13
■ PID parameter (CH1) setting• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7-18
■ PID parameter (CH2) setting• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7-21
■ Setup data setting • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7-24
■ Detailed descriptions of setup data settings • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7-31
■ Constant value control data (CH1) setting• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7-36
■ Constant value control data (CH2) setting• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7-36
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
8-1 Program Setup • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-1
■ Selecting number of program to operate • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-1
■ Selecting channel of program to operate • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-1
■ Starting programming • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-2
■ State transition • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-2
■ Programming map• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-4
■ Display items • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-5
■ Setting pattern items • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-5
■ Setting event items • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-7
■ Setting PID groups and output limiter group number items • • • • • • • 8-12
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Setting G.SOAK (Guarantee soak) items• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-13
■ Setting PV shift items • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-14
■ Setting repeat items• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-15
■ Setting PV start items • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-16
■ Setting cycle items • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-17
■ Setting pattern link items • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-18
■ Setting tag items • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-19
■ Deleting programs• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-20
■ Inserting and deleting segments • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-21
8-2 Copying Programs • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-23
■ Program copy procedures • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-23
8-3 General Reset• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-24
■ General reset procedures• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 8-24
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS
9-1 Memory Card Type and Functions • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-1
9-2 Save Procedures • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-2
■ Save menu • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-2
■ Procedures for formatting cards • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-3
■ Procedures for saving single programs • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-3
■ Procedures for saving all programs • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-4
■ Procedures for saving setup data• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-4
■ Procedures for saving variable parameters• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-4
■ Procedures for saving PID parameters • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-5
■ Procedures for saving event configuration data • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-5
■ Procedures for saving all parameters• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-5
9-3 Load Procedures • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-6
■ Load menu • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-6
■ Card battery alarm panel • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-7
■ Procedures for loading individual programs• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-7
■ Procedures for loading all programs • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-8
■ Procedures for loading setup data • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-8
■ Procedures for loading variable parameters • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-8
■ Procedures for loading PID parameters • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-8
■ Procedures for loading event configuration data• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-9
■ Procedures for loading all parameters • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-9
9-4 Autoload • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-10
■ key operated autoload procedure• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-10
■ Auto load using external switch inputs• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-11
9-5 Error Message List • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 9-12
Chapter 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10-1 Self-Diagnostic Functions and Alarm Code Displays • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10-1
■ Power ON self-diagnostic routines • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10-1
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Self-diagnostic routines performed each sampling cycle• • • • • • • • • 10-1
■ Self-diagnostic routines performed continuously during operation • 10-1
■ Alarm code display • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10-2
■ Alarm classification• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10-2
10-2 Key Input Related Problems • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10-3
■ Normal display mode problems • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10-3
■ Parameter setting related problems • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10-6
■ Program setting related problems • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10-6
10-3 When the BAT LED Flashes• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10-8
■ BAT LED flashes • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10-8
■ Replacing the battery• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10-8
Chapter 11. SPECIFICATIONS
11-1 Specifications• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 11-1
■ Attachment/auxiliary devices list • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 11-7
11-2 External Dimensions• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 11-8
■ DCP552• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 11-8
■ Soft dust-proof cover set (optional) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 11-8
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
■ Precautions before calibration • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 12-1
■ Equipment needed• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 12-1
12-1 Quick Reference Table for Calibration Items• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 12-2
12-2 Calibration Procedures • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 12-7
■ Enter calibration mode• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 12-7
■ Function test• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 12-8
■ PV calibration • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 12-11
■ Cold junction sensor calibration• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 12-14
■ Current output calibration • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 12-15
■ Carbon potential code calibration• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 12-16
12-3 Set Up • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 12-17
Program Work Sheet
Parameter Work Sheet
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Index
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Conventions Used in This Manual
The following conventions are used in this manual.
Handling Precautions
: Handling Precautions indicate items that the user should pay attention
to when handling the DCP552.
NOTE
: Notes indicate useful information that the user might benefit by
knowing.
(1)(2)(3)
: The numbers with the parenthesis indicate steps in a sequence or
indicate corresponding parts in an explanation.
>>
: Controller state after an operation
DISP key, ↑ key
: Indicate the DCP552 keys. These symbols represent keys on the
DCP552’s console.
FUNC+PROG key
PA01, C21
: Combinations of symbols like this indicatate that PROG key must be
pressed while holding FUNC key down.
: Indicate the 7 segment display of. DCP552 display panel 1 and display
panel 2.
PV SHIFT
: Indicates messages displayed by the DCP552 message display.
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1. PRODUCT OUTLINE
1 - 1
Features
The DCP552 is a general purpose dual-loop control programmer for controlling temperature, pressure, flow rate,
carbon potential (CP) and other parameters. The program provides a total of 49 patterns and up to 99 segments can
be set for each pattern. Note, however, that the maximum number of segments is 2000 or less and that the
maximum number of subfunctions for setting events is 4000 or less.
● High accuracy in multi-range inputs
Featuring a multi-range format, the user can select thermocouple, resistance
temperature detector, DC voltage or DC current. Accuracy is ±0.1% FS ±1 digit,
the sampling cycles is 0.1 sec and some model numbers allow PV2 channel O2
sensor inputs for carbon potential compensation.
● Multi-control output types
Selection at setup allows the user to choose from among current proportional
output, voltage time proportional output and open collector time proportional
output.
● Multi-communications
Selection at setup enables the user to switch between RS-485 and RS-232C on the
rear panel terminal base.
At setup it is also possible to switch the communications port from the rear panel
terminal base to the front panel loader jack. A special cable is required to use to
loader jack on the front panel.
● Improved PLC support
The programmer is equipped with 16 external switch inputs and 16 event outputs
for flexible support of PLC based automatic systems.
● Simple operation
The optional plug-in memory card makes it easy to achieve program and
parameter settings for later reuse. Also, the optional smart loader package allows
you to make program and parameter settings from a PC.
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1. PRODUCT OUTLINE
1 - 2
Basic Function Block Diagram
Input 1
Control operation unit
•Mode transition
Output1
•Output change limit
•Upper and lower limit
•
•
Root extraction
Approximation by
linearization table
•Thermocouple
•Current proportionality
•Voltage time proportionality
•Open collector time proportionality
•
Resistance temperature detector
•DC current
•DC voltage
•PID control
•Auto tuning
•Bias
•Filter
Output2
•
Forward-reverse operation
*
3
•Output change limit
•Upper and lower limit
•ON-OFF control
•Current proportionality
•Voltage time proportionality
Input 2
•Thermocouple
•SP limit
•SP bias
•Open collector time proportionality
•
•
Root extraction
Approximation by
linearization table
Bias
•
Resistance temperature detector
•DC current
•DC voltage
•O2 sensor
Event output : 16 points
•
•
•Time event
•PV
Filter
•SP
•Deviation
•MV
•Code
External switch input: 12 points
•RUN
•HOLD
•RESET
•ADV
•Program No.
•Code with timer
•Each mode
•Alarm
•Segment No. code
•Specific segment
•Program No. code
•PV change rate
•O2 sensor error
•
CH1 operation cancellation
CH2 operation cancellation
External switch input: 4 points
*
1
•FAST
Auxiliary output : 1 point/2 points
•RAMP-E
•AUTO/MANUAL
•AT
•PV
•SP
•Deviation
•MV
•G.SOAK reset
•
Forward-reverse operation
•Auto load
•O2 sensor check
*
1
RS-485/RS-232C communication input/output
Key operation
•Display selection
•
Display channel selection
Loader communication input/output
Memory card
•Program No.
•RUN/HOLD
•RESET
•ADV
•FAST
*
*
2
2
Memory Card
Reader Writer
+
•Program
•Parameter
•AUTO/MANUAL
•AT
Smart Loader
Package
•Program setting
•Parameter setting
•
Memory card operation
*
*
*
1 : Option for some models
2 : Option
Program
Parameter
3 : Model numbers without CP compensation
allows selection of thermocouple, resistance
temperature detector, DC current and DC
voltage while model numbers with CP
compensation also allows selection of O2
sensor.
•2 channels x 49 patterns x
99 segments
•Event
•Variable parameter
•Event configuration
•PID parameter
•Setup
•
PID group/output limiter group
•G.SOAK
•PV shift
•Repeat
•Constant value control
•PV start
•Cycle
•Pattern link
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1. PRODUCT OUTLINE
1 - 3
Data Configuration Overview
Data is comprised of parameters and the program.
Parameters are used to set the functions of the DCP552 while the program is the software that operates the
controller at run time.
● A total of 49 patterns
It will store up to 49 programs per channel (CH1 and CH2), with up to 99
segments per program.
Program number = 49
Segment count = 8
For CH2
SP
(3)
(4)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Program number = 2
Segment count = 15
For CH1
Time
Program number = 1 Segment count = 19
(13)
(14)
For CH2
Program number = 1
SP
Segment count = 6
For CH1
(15)
(18)
(5)
(19)
(6)
(4)
Time
(3)
(2)
(1)
Time
Time
● Parameters
Five types of patterns are provided: variable parameters, event configuration data,
PID parameters, setup data and constant value control data.
Variable parameter
Event configuration data
PID parameter (CH1)
PID parameter (CH2)
Setup data
Constant value control data (CH1)
Constant value control data (CH2)
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1. PRODUCT OUTLINE
1 - 4
System Configuration
● CPL communications network-based configuration
Models equipped with the optional communications interface can be connected as
a slaved controller to a communications network. In this case, the user can employ
as the master station a personal Computer.
PC
master station
RS-232C
RS-232C/RS-485 converter
RS-485
DCP552(slave station)
PC
ST221DE05DCP (Smart Terminal dedicated display)
(slave station)
RS-485
RS-232C
DCP552 (slave station)
DCP552 (master station)
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1. PRODUCT OUTLINE
1 - 5
Model Number
Model number : DCP552E2 ● ● ● ●
PV input Carbon
Additional
Basic mode
number
l
Option
Contents
Digital programmable controller (dual-loop control)
Mark II
processing
count
potential
DCP552
E
2
2 channels
0
1
Not provided
Provided
0
1
2
Not provided
Auxiliary output channel 1
Auxiliary output channel 2, communications
Not provided
00
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
2 - 1
Structure
The DCP552 consists of a main unit, console, case, and terminal base.
Console
Provides 7-segment displays, LEDs, operation keys,
and a loader interface unit.
Case
Terminal cover
Covers power supply and
prevents electric shock.
Terminal base
Provides terminals to connect a power supply,
input, output, event output, external switch input,
and auxiliary output (optional) , etc.
Main unit
Console and electric circuit board, etc.
PROG
SEG
PV
DEV
OUT
CYC
SP
PROFILE
RUN
AT
HLD
MAN
PRG
BAT
EG1
EG2
TM
SYN
ADV
PROG RUN/HOLD DISP
RESET
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
A/M
PID
AT
PARA
CLR
FUNC
SETUP
ENTER
LOAD LOADER SAVE
Lock screw
CARD
Secures case to main unit.
Key cover
Prevents operation errors.
Memory card slot
A memory card is inserted into this slot.
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
2 - 2
Console
The console consists of the operation keys, displays and LEDs (light emitting diodes).
■ Basic display status
Basic display status shows the running condition of the DCP552 on the console.
The basic display status is invoked when the DCP552 is powered up (power on).
Key operations make it possible to change from the basic display status to
parameter setting status, program setting status, program copy status, memory card
operation status and general reset status.
Power on
Basic display status
Parameter setting status
Program setting status
Memory card operation status
General reset status
Program copy status
Key operations can also be used to return to the basic display status.
■ Display
Program number display
Display panel 1
(PROG display)
(Upper display)
PROG
SEG
PV
DEV
OUT
CYC
SP
Segment number display
(SEG display)
Basic display contents
LED
PROFILE
RUN
AT
Profile display
HLD
MAN
PRG
BAT
EG1
EG2
TM
SYN
Display panel 2
ADV
PROG RUN/HOLD DISP
(Lower display)
RESET
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Message display
LCD (16 characters × 2 lines)
Mode display LED
■ Basic display LEDs
PV : Lights during PV display, otherwise off.
DEV : Lights during deviation display, otherwise off.
OUT : Lights during output display, otherwise off.
CYC : Lights during cycle display, otherwise off.
SP
: Lights during SP display, otherwise off.
TM : Lights during time display, otherwise off.
SYN : Lights in CH1 and CH2 sync mode, otherwise off.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
■ Display panel 1
Indicates PV and other data in basic display status.
Indicates item codes in parameter setting status.
Indicates set values and item codes in program setting status.
■ Display panel 2
Indicates SP, time, output and other data in basic display status.
Indicates set values in parameter setting status.
Indicates set values in program setting status.
■ Message display
Indicates output graph, deviation graph, running progress graph, event status,
program tag and other data in basic display status.
Displays reference messages in parameter setting status.
Displays tag settings and reference messages in program setting status.
Indicates selected operation and operation results during memory card
operation.
■ Program number display
Indicates a selected program number in basic display status.
Indicates a set program number in program setting status.
Off during constant value control.
Indicates the alarm code “AL” when an alarm occurs in basic display status.
■ Segment number display
Indicates a selected segment number in basic display status.
Indicates a set segment number in program setting status.
Off during constant value control.
Indicates an alarm code number when an alarm occurs in basic display status.
■ Mode display LED
RUN, HLD : Indicates the RUN, HOLD, FAST, END, and READY FAST
modes (see the table below).
Mode
READY
RUN
HOLD
FAST
END
READY FAST
LED
RUN
HLD
OFF
OFF
Lights
OFF
OFF
Flicker
OFF
OFF
Lights
Lights
Lights
Flickers
MAN
: Lights in MANUAL mode. Off in AUTO mode.
: Lights in program setting status, otherwise off.
: Flickers during auto tuning execution, otherwise off.
PRG
AT
BAT
EG1
EG2
: Flickers when battery voltage is too low, otherwise off.
: Lights when CH1 is displayed, otherwise off.
: Lights when CH2 is displayed, otherwise off.
■ Profile display
Indicates the rising, soaking, and falling trends of a program pattern.
Flickers during G.SOAK wait and lights continuously after power on.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
■ Key pad
CAUTION
Do not use pointed obj ects such as mechanical pencils or pins to press the
keys on the controller.
This may result in malfunction.
PROG
: Program key (PROG key)
RUN/HOLD
: Run/hold key
(RUN/HOLD key)
DISP
: Display key (DISP key)
MESSAGE
: Message key
(MESSAGE key)
PROG
SEG
PV
DEV
OUT
CYC
SP
PROFILE
RUN
AT
HLD
MAN
PRG
BAT
EG1
EG2
TM
SYN
ADV
PROG RUN/HOLD DISP
RESET
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
A/M
PID
: Auto/manual key (A/M key)
: PID key (PID key)
A/M
PID
AT
PARA
CLR
: Left key (←key)
: Right key →( key)
: Up key ↑( key)
FUNC
SETUP
ENTER
PARA
CLR
LOAD LOADER SAVE
: Parameter key (PARA key)
: CLR key (CLR key)
CARD
: Down key ↓( key)
FUNC
AT
: Function key (FUNC key)
: Auto tuning key (AT key)
: Setup key (SETUP key)
: Enter key (ENTER key)
SETUP
ENTER
LOAD
: Load key (LOAD key)
: Save key (SAVE key)
SAVE
( ) : Denotes key term used in this manual.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
■ Key chord functions
PROG + RUN/HOLD
: Reset key
Press the RUN/HOLD key while holding down the PROG key in basic status
display to perform a RESET.
The READY mode is invoked when a reset is performed in the RUN, HOLD,
FAST, END, or READY FAST modes. This RESET operation does not work
in the READY mode.
PROG + DISP
: Advance key
Press the DISP key while holding down the PROG key in the program run mode
in basic status display to perform an ADV (advance) operation. The next segment
is displayed when this action is performed in the RUN, HOLD, FAST, or
READY FAST modes. This ADV operation does not work in the READY mode.
FUNC + →
: Fast key
Press the → key while holding down the FUNC key in the program run mode
in basic status display to perform a FAST operation.
The system changes from the RUN or HOLD mode to the FAST mode. If the
system is in the READY mode, it goes to the READY FAST mode.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
FUNC + DISP
: Display channel select key
Press the DISP key while holding down the FUNC key in basic display status
to select display channels.
In the program setting status, press the DISP key while holding down the
FUNC key to select the channel of the program to be set.
FUNC + PARA
FUNC + PID
: Event configuration setting key
Press the PARA key while holding down the FUNC key in basic status
display to switch to the event configuration setting status.
: constant value control setting key
Press the PID key while holding down the FUNC key in basic status display
to switch to the constant value control setting status.
FUNC + PROG
: Program setting (programming) key
Press the PROG key while holding down the FUNC key in the program run
mode in basic status display to go to the program setting (programming) status.
When the PROG key is pressed while holding down the FUNC key in the
program setting status, allows you to change the number of the program to be
set.
FUNC + CLR
: Program delete key
Press the CLR key while holding down the FUNC key during registration in
the program setting status to delete a setting or return to a default value.
FUNC + ENTER
: Segment insert/remove/RAMP/selection key
Press the ENTER key while holding down the FUNC key to go to the
segment insert/delete panel during SP and time setting in the program setting
status.
Pressing the ENTER key while the FUNC key is held down during SP
registration in the program setting status allows you to switch between RAMP-
X and RAMP-T as well as RAMP-X and RAMP-E.
↑ + PROG
: Program copy key
Press the PROG key while holding down the ↑ key in program run READY
mode in basic display status to go to the program copy panel.
FUNC + CLR + MESSAGE : General reset key
Press the CLR and MESSAGE keys simultaneously while holding down the
FUNC key in the READY AUTO mode in the basic display status to go to the
general reset verification panel.
■ Loader jack
This jack allows the connection of a loader.
Do not insert plugs other than loader plugs.
The loader jack is not isolated from internal digital circuits.
When not in use, always replace the cap.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
2 - 3
Input Type and Range Number
■ Input
■ Thermocouple
Input type
Code
K46
Input range (FS)
˚C ˚F
-200.0 to +200.0 -300.0 to +400.0 ±0.1%FS
Accuracy (under standard conditions)
Symbol
K (CA)
Range No.
16
0
K (CA)
K09
0.0 to 1200.0
0.0 to 800.0
0.0 to 400.0
0.0 to 800.0
0.0 to 800.0
0 to 2400
0 to 1600
0 to 750
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
K (CA)
K08
1
K (CA)
K04
2
E (CRC)
J (IC)
E08
3
0 to 1800
0 to 1600
J 08
4
T (CC)
T44
5
-200.0 to +300.0 -300 to +700
±0.3%FS at -200 to -45 ˚C
B (PR30-6)
B18
6
0.0 to 1800.0
0 to 3300
±4.0%FS at 0 to 260 ˚C,
±0.15%FS at 260 to 800 ˚C
R (RR13)
S (PR10)
R16
S16
7
8
0.0 to 1600.0
0.0 to 1600.0
0.0 to 2300.0
0.0 to 1400.0
0.0 to 1900.0
0 to 3100
0 to 3100
0 to 4200
0 to 2552
0 to 3400
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.2%FS
W (WRe5-26) W23
W (WRe5-26) W14
9
10
11
PR40-20
D19
±0.9%FS at 0 to 300 ˚C,
±0.5%FS at 300 to 800 ˚C
N
U13
Y13
Z13
Z06
12
13
14
15
0.0 to 1300.0
0.0 to 1300.0
0.0 to 1300.0
32 to 2372
32 to 2372
32 to 2372
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.4%FS
PL II
Ni-Ni • Mo
Gold, iron, chromel
0.0 to 300.0K (K : Kelvin)
■ Resistance temperature detector (RTD)
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
■ DC current, DC voltage
Input type
Input range (FS)
Accuracy (under standard conditions)
Symbol
mA
Code
C01
Z51
M01
L02
Range No.
48
4 to 20mA
2.4 to 20mA
0 to 10mV
-10 to +10mV
0 to 100mV
4 to 20mA
2.4 to 20mA
0 to 1V
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
±0.1%FS
Programmable range
-19999 to +20000
(Decimal point
52
(Linear)
mV
49
position is variable.)
50
(Linear)
51
C01
Z51
128
134
129
mA
(Linear)
V
130
131
132
133
135
-1 to +1V
1 to 5V
±0.1%FS
(Linear)
V01
±0.1%FS
0 to 5V
±0.1%FS
0 to 10V
±0.1%FS
0 to 1250mV
–0.1%FS When converted to mV values
O2 sensor *
Carbon potential (CP value)
indication range:
0.000 to 4.000% C
(Note, however, that PID control
is calculated over the 0.000 to
2.000% input range)
Oxygen pressure indication range:
0.000 to 1.500 x 10-20 atm
* •The O2 sensor is manufactured by one of the following companies: Nihon Gaishi (NGK), Marathon
Monitors, Cambridge, Corning, AACC (Advanced Atmosphere Control Corporation), Barber
Colman or Furnace Control.
•PV2 in models with carbon potential compensation is tied to the O sensor.
2
Handling Precautions
•The unit for code Z06 is “ K” (kelvin).
•Code F50 and P50 do not generate the PV lower limit alarm.
•The number of decimal digits for DC current and DC voltage is
programmable from 0 to 4.
•The O2 sensor generates the PV upper limit alarm at values of 1375mV or
above, but does not generate the PV lower limit alarm.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3. INSTALLATION AND MOUNTING
3 - 1
Before Installation
WARNING
Be sure to turn off the power supply when you are installing or removing the
controller.
Failure to heed this warning may lead to electric shock.
Do not disassemble the controller as this could lead to electric shock or
malfunction.
CAUTION
Be sure to follow the operating requirements (regarding temperature,
humidity, voltage, vibration, shock, mounting direction, atmosphere, etc.) as
stated in the specifications of the controller.
Failure to heed this caution may lead to fire or malfunction.
Do not block ventilation openings.
Failure to heed this caution may lead to fire or malfunction.
Make sure that wire scraps, chips, or water do not enter inside the case of the
controller.
Failure to heed this caution may lead to fire or malfunction.
■ Mounting position
Do not install the DCP552 in locations:
•exposed to high or low temperature or humidity.
•exposed to direct sunlight or to the elements such as outside.
•exposed to water, oil or chemicals.
•exposed to corrosive or inflammable gas.
•exposed to dust or smoke.
•exposed to vibrations or shocks.
•exposed to strong electric or magnetic fields.
•exposed to electric noise such as ignition devices or welding machines.
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3. INSTALLATION AND MOUNTING
■ Sources of electrical interference and countermeasures
•The following list notes common sources of electrical interference.
(1) Relays and contacts
(2) Solenoid coils and valves
(3) Power lines (especially those carrying more than 90V AC)
(4) Inductive loads
(5) Inverters
(6) Motor rectifiers
(7) Phase angle control SCR
(8) Wireless communications equipment
(9) Welding machines
(10) High voltage ignition devices
•If the source of noise cannot be removed, take the following measures.
•Use a CR filter to suppress fast-rising noise.
Recommended CR filter : No. 81446365-001
•Use a varistor to suppress high-amplitude interference.
Recommended varistors : No. 81446366-001 (for 110 to 120V)
81446367-001 (for 200 to 240V)
Handling Precautions
Varistors must be handled carefully as they become defective if they are
short-circuited.
■ Dust proof cover
Use the soft dust proof cover when the DCP552 is used in locations where there is
a lot of dust.
See Section “Soft dust-proof cover set (optional)” on page 11-8 for details.
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3. INSTALLATION AND MOUNTING
3 - 2
Installation
This section describes installation procedures.
■ Panel cutout dimension
Use 2mm thick steel panels in setting up the DCP552.
138 +1
Unit : mm
0
200 or more
Handling Precautions
Install the DCP552 in a location where the lower panel is not exposed to
temperatures that exceed the operating temperature range (0 to 50°C).
Make sure that the temperatures above and below the controller meet
specified requirements.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3. INSTALLATION AND MOUNTING
■ Installation procedures
Mounting bracket
Mounting (2)
Mounting (1)
Mounting bracket
•Use the provided mounting bracket to firmly secure the upper and lower panels.
•Assemble the instrument before mounting (1).
Handling Precautions
When the provided mounting brackets are firmly secured and there is
no looseness, turn the screws only one full turn. Over-tightening the
screws of the brackets can deform or damage the case.
•The rear of the instrument must not be more than 10° above or below the
horizontal plane.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 1
Precautions on Wiring
WARNING
Connect the FG terminal to ground with a ground resistance of maximum
100Ω before connecting other equipment and external control circuits.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or fire.
Be sure to turn off the power supply when you connect the controller.
Failure to do so may lead to electric shock or fire.
Do not touch a live part such as a power terminal.
This may result in electric shock.
CAUTION
Connect the controller as specified using designated cables and connection
procedures.
Failure to heed this caution may lead to electric shock, fire or malfunction.
Make sure that wire scraps, chips or water do not enter inside the case of the controller.
Failure to heed this caution may lead to fire or malfunction.
Current applied to current input terminals (55), (56) and (58), (59) must meet
the specified range.
Failure to heed this caution may lead to fire or equipment breakdown.
All terminal screws shall be tightened to specified torque.
Improperly tightened screws may lead to electric shock or fire.
Do not use unused terminals on the instrument as relay terminals for other
equipment. Failure to heed this caution may lead to electric shock, fire or
equipment breakdown.
Attaching the terminal covers after completing the controller connections is
highly recommended.
Failure to heed this caution may lead to fire or malfunction. (Terminal covers
are supplied with the controller.)
Use induced lighting surge preventive device Non if there is a risk of power
surges caused by lighting.
Failure to do so may cause fire or malfunction.
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
Handling Precautions
•Before connecting the lines, verify the model number and terminal
numbers on the label affixed to the side panel of the DCP552. After
completing, always double check to ensure all wiring has been performed
correctly before turning on the power.
•The I/O signal lines and the communications lines shall maintain at least
50cm between them and the power supply line and power supply cables.
Do not route these cables through the same conduit or duct.
•Make sure that no crimp-style solderless wire connectors are touching an
adjacent terminal or connector.
•When connecting a thermocouple input of the DCP552 to another
instrument, make sure the instrument’s input impedance totals at least
1MΩ. If less than 1MΩ, the DCP552 may not be able to detect sensor
disconnection.
•Cautions when using data input devices in combination
Input of the DCP552 input or output (connected in parallel for input) to an
A/D converter, analog scanner, etc., may cause dispersion of the read
data. To prevent such occurrence, take one of the following corrective
measures.
(1)Use a low-speed integral A/D converter.
(2)Insert an isolator with no switching power supply between the
DCP552 and the A/D converter.
(3)Perform averaging with a personal computer when the data is read.
(4)If the device permits, insert an input filter.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 2
Recommended Cables
To perform thermocouple input, connect a thermocouple element to the terminals. When the wiring distance is long
or when connecting the thermocouple without the element to the terminals, connect via shielded compensating lead
wires.
NOTE
•For I/O other than thermocouple, use polyethylene insulated vinyl sheathed cable
for JCS-364 shielded instruments or equivalent. (general name: twisted shielded
cable for instrument use)
The following cables are recommended.
2-wire
3-wire
2-wire
3-wire
IPEV-S-0.9mm2 × 1P
ITEV-S-0.9mm2 × 1T
KPEV-S-0.9mm2 × 1P
KTEV-S-0.9mm2 × 1T
Fujikura
Cable Co.
Hitachi Cable
Co.
•A shielded multicore microphone cord (MVVS) may be used, if electromagnetic
induction is comparatively low.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 3
Making Terminal Connections
To connect a line to the terminals, use crimp-style solderless wire connectors that fit an M3.5 screw.
Unit : mm
¿3.7
Handling Precautions
•If the DCP552 is mounted in a location subject to noticeable vibration or
impact, be sure to use round crimp-style solderless wire connectors to
prevent lines from becoming disconnected from the terminals.
•Be careful not to allow any of the crimp-style solderless wire connectors to
touch adjacent terminals or connectors.
•
•The terminal screws shall be tightened to 0.78 to 0.98 N m torque.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 4
Terminal Array
Wires are connected to the terminal base according to the layout shown below.
LOAD
LOAD
DI
DO
DO
DO
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
COM1 9 9 10 1011
DO
COM1 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 5 17 6 18 7 19 8 20
1122 1223COM224
1327 1428
9 25 1026
1129 1230
1333 1434
DI
1531 1632
AC100 240V 50/60Hz
25VA MAX
1537 1638
COM2 41
39
40
53
OUT
* AUX
+
—
+
—
+
—
+
—
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
OUT1
OUT2
AUX1
AUX2
FG
A 54 + B 55 —C 56 + A 57 B 58 C 59 + 60
61
SDB
SD
62
RDA
63
RDB
RD
64
SG (RS-485)
SG (RS-232C)
+
—
SDA
mA
O2
mA
T/C
mV. V
T/C
mV. V
RTD
RTD
PV CH1
* PV CH2
MADE IN JAPAN
* COMM
* : OPTION
40733000100
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 5
Power Supply and Grounding
■ Power supply
To supply power to the DCP552, use an instrument-dedicated single-phase power
supply subject to minimal electrical interference.
200 to 240/200 to 240V
110 to 120/110 to 120V
Insulating transformer
Recommended product
81446364-001
Line filter
DCP552
Instrument power supply
39
40
1
3
100 to 240V AC
50/60Hz
E
GND
53
52 or
4
2
Grounding
Grounding
Other circuits
Handling Precautions
•If electrical interference proves excessive, we recommend adding an
insulating transformer and/or using a line filter.
model No.: 81446364-001
•After carrying out interference reducing measures, do not bundle the
primary and secondary power supply coils together or insert them in the
same conduit or duct.
■ Grounding
If grounding the shield wire or other lines proves difficult, ground them separately
to a grounding terminal block.
Type
: A ground resistance of maximum 100Ω
Conductor : Annealed copper wire, min. 2mm2 (AWG14)
Max. Length : 20m
Handling Precautions
To ground the DCP552, connect the FG terminal (terminal (52) or (53)) to a
single ground point without jumpering.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 6
PV Input (Analog Input) Connection
CAUTION
Current applied to current input terminals (55), (56) and (58), (59) must meet
the specified range.
Failure to heed this caution may lead to fire or equipment breakdown.
■ PV input CH1 connection
PV input CH1 is a multi-input type input for sensors. Connect as shown below,
according to the type of sensor being used.
■ PV input CH2 connection
PV input CH2 is a multi-input type input for sensors. Connect as shown below,
according to the type of sensor being used.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
Handling Precautions
•Be careful to connect the input polarities correctly.
•Use shielded cable to connect the input.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 7
Control Output Connection
WARNING
Be sure to turn off the power supply when you are installing or removing the
controller.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or fire.
■ Current output (5G, 5S)
■ Voltage output (6D)
C91
C92
Handling Precautions
The voltage output is a constant current circuit inside. The SSR used is set
to an optimum voltage to meet the requirements of the load. Enter the
value in the setup data. A normal SSR voltage has been set at the factory
before shipment.
■ Open collector output (8D)
Handling Precautions
• Do not short-circuit the positive (+) terminal of the external power supply
to terminal (43) on the DCP552. Doing so causes the open collector
outputs to malfunction. (There is no short-circuit preventing circuit
inside.)
• When connecting a semiconductor load such as a programmable
controller (sequencer), select a module in which the current directions
match.
Use one made inoperative by the leakage current produced when the
digital outputs are shut off.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 8
Auxiliary Output Connection
WARNING
Be sure to turn off the power supply when you connect the controller.
Failure to do so may lead to electric shock or fire.
■ Auxiliary output CH1 connection
■ Auxiliary output CH2 connection
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 9
Event Output (Open Collector Output) Connection
EV1 EV2 EV3 EV4 EV5 EV6 EV7 EV8
+
—
External power supply
12 to 24V DC
5
6
7
8 17 18 19 20 9
Max. load current
Max. common current
Leakage current when OFF
: 70mA/point
: 500mA
: less than 0.1mA
EV9 EV10 EV11 EV12 EV13 EV14 EV15 EV16
+
—
External power supply
12 to 24V DC
10 11 22 23 27 28 31 32 24
Max. load current
Max. common current
: 70mA/point
: 500mA
Leakage current when OFF : less than 0.1mA
Handling Precautions
• Do not short-circuit the positive (+) terminal of the external power supply
to terminals (5) to (8), (17) to (20), (10), (11), (22), (23), (27), (28), (31),
and (32) on the DCP552. Doing so causes the open collector outputs to
malfunction. (There is no short-circuit preventing circuit inside.)
• When connecting a semiconductor load such as a programmable
controller (sequencer), select a module in which the current directions
match.
Use one made inoperative by the leakage current produced when the
digital outputs are shut off.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 10
External Switch Input Connection
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
1
2
3
4 13 14 15 16 12
SW9 SW10 SW11 SW12 SW13 SW14 SW15 SW16
CH1 CH2
: With BCD
1
2
4
8
10 20
cancel cancel
41
25 26 29 30 33 34 37 38
■ Internal circuit diagram of the DCP552 connecting external switch input
8.5V DC
8.5V DC
Internal
circuit
Handling Precautions
• The inputs of the DCP552 unit are provided with a built-in power supply
(open voltage type, 8.5V DC). Always use no-voltage contacts
externally.
• For the no-voltage contacts, use gold contacts or other relays that switch
on small currents. Other types of relay contacts may not switch. Use
contacts that have ample margin over the minimum switching capacity
with respect to the current and open voltage ratings of contacts provided
on the DCP552.
• If using semiconductors (open collectors, etc.) as no-voltage contacts,
use one that maintains a potential of no more than 2V across the
contacts when actuated, and a leakage current of no more than 0.1mA
when shut off.
• The digital inputs (remote switch inputs) of all SDC40 and SDC10 series
units can be connected in parallel. If connecting them in parallel to
another instrument, carefully check the requirements of the other
instrument before proceeding.
• Do not connect SDC20/21, SDC30/31 series in parallel. Doing so may
cause the external switch input to malfunction.
• Common terminals (12) and (41) of the external switch input are
connected internally.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 11
Communication Connection
■ RS-485 connection
SDA SDB RDA RDB SG
60 61 62 63 64
Handling Precautions
• The slave station can be connected in a multi-drop configuration.
• Always set a unique address to each slave station.
• Attach terminating resistances (a total of four when connecting a 5-wire
system) to the ends of the communications lines. Use 1/2W or greater
terminating resistances of 150Ω ±5%.
• If connecting three lines, short-circuit terminals (60), (62) and (61), (63).
• Do not short-circuit the RDA to RDB and SDA to SDB terminals.
Doing so may cause the DCP552 to malfunction.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
■ 5-wire system RS-485 connection diagram
Terminating resistor
Slave station side DCP552
SDA
60
SDB
RDA
61
62
63
Terminating resistor
RDB
SG
64
FG
Shield
Master station
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
FG
Shield
Slave station side DCP552
SDA
60
SDB
RDA
61
62
63
RDB
SG
64
FG
Shield
Slave station side DCP552
SDA
60
SDB
RDA
61
62
63
Terminating resistor
Terminating resistor
RDB
SG
64
FG
Attach 1/2W or greater terminating resistances of 150Ω ±5% at each end of the
communications lines. Ground the shield FGs at one end in one location, not at
both ends.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
■ 3-wire system RS-485 connection diagram
Slave station side DCP552
SDA
60
Terminating resistor
SDB
RDA
61
62
63
RDB
SG
64
FG
Master station
RDA
Shield
RDB
SDA
*
SDB
*
SG
FG
Shield
Slave station side DCP552
SDA
60
SDB
RDA
61
62
63
RDB
SG
64
FG
Shield
Slave station side DCP552
SDA
60
SDB
RDA
Terminating resistor
61
62
63
RDB
SG
64
FG
Attach 1/2W or greater terminating resistances of 150Ω ±5% at each end of the
communications lines. Ground the shield FGs at one end in one location, not at
both ends.
When only three RS-485 terminals are provided, the areas designated with an
asterisk (*) are connected internally.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
■ RS-232C connection
Example of connection using
SD
RD
SG
61
63 64
Host computer (master station)
Handling Precautions
• Connect the slave station to the master station in a single-drop (point-to-
point) configuration.
• There are three (SD, RD and FG) communications terminals on the RS-
232C interface on the master station which may not output data if not
short-circuited as shown above.
NOTE
RS-232C connector signals (9 pins)
Example : IBM and compatibles
Signal direction
Host Instrument
Pin No.
Name
←
←
→
→
DCD
RxD
TxD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
←
→
←
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
■ Connection to ST221
SDA SDB RDA RDB SG
60 61 62 63 64
3 4 1 2 5
ST221DE05DCP
Handling Precautions
• Attach 1/2W or greater terminating resistances of 150Ω ±5% at each
end of the communications lines.
• The DCP552 operates as a master station when connected to an ST221
during communications.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4 - 12
Isolation Between Input and Output
Isolation between inputs and outputs are shown below. In this figure, the solid lines enclose mutually-isolated
sections. Those sections bounded by dashed lines are not isolated.
PV input CH1
PV input CH2
Control output CH1
Auxiliary output CH1
Control output CH2
Auxiliary output CH2
Event output
Digital
circuit
Loader communication
External switch input
Communication
Memory card input
Handling Precautions
The loader jack is not isolated from internal digital circuits.
When not in use, always replace the cap.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
5 - 1
Data
■ Data types
The data types are listed below.
For further information on data types, see “Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP”
and “Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP”.
Data
Parameter
Variable parameter
Data changeable in RUN mode
Event configuration data
PID parameter data (CH1)
PID parameter data (CH2)
Event type data
PID group and output limiter group control parameters
PID group and output limiter group control parameters
Basic data only changeable in the READY mode
Constant value control SP, PID and other data
Constant value control SP, PID and other data
Setup data
Constant value control data (CH1)
Constant value control data (CH2)
Pattern
SP and time, SP and θ or SP and
∆SP data
Program
Event
Data for event 1 to 16
PID group and output limiter
group number
Data for PID group number used for control
and output limiter group number
G.SOAK
PV shift
Repeat
PV start
Cycle
Data indicating whether G.SOAK is provided or not
PV shift data
Data indicating whether repeat is used or not
Data indicating whether PV start is used or not
Cycle count data
Pattern link
Tag
Pattern link destination program number data
Tag (8 characters) data
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
5 - 2
Program Pattern
■ Pattern
Separate programs are set in CH1 and CH2 for each program number.
Three systems for selecting programs are provided: RAMP-X, RAMP-T and
RAMP-E. The first segment of each program is always RAMP-X, but the other
segments can be any system and all three types can be used in one program.
■ RAMP-X system
This system, sets a segment of a pattern using SP and time, is called RAMP-X.
SP setting : within the upper and lower SP limiter range
Time setting: 0 hours 00 minutes to 500 hours 00 minutes
0 minutes 00 seconds to 500 minutes 00 seconds or
0.0 seconds to 3000.0 seconds
(Time units are selected using the C62 setup data setting.)
SP is a point on the elapsed time axis in the current segment, which is a straight
line connecting the start point, the SP set value in the previous segment, and the
end point, the SP set value in the current segment. Segments are classified as
follows.
•Rising RAMP (or rising slope)
Previous segment SP setting < current segment SP setting
•Falling RAMP (or descending slope)
Previous segment SP setting > current segment SP setting
•SOAK (soaking)
Previous segment SP setting = current segment SP setting
The start and end points of the first segment are also the SOAK segment of the SP
set value for the first segment.
SP calculation (other than first segment)
SP = (current segment SP set value – previous segment SP set value)
× (current segment elapsed time ÷ current segment time setting)
+ previous segment SP setting.
SP
Time setting of current segment
SP set value of
current segment
SP set value of
previous segment
Time
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ RAMP-T system (θ setting)
In the RAMP-T system, a segment is set using SP and ramp θ (theta).
SP setting : within the upper and lower SP limiter range
θ setting
: 1 to 10000 (SPU/hour, SPU/min, SPU/sec)
(Time units are selected using the C62 setup data setting.)
SP is a point on the elapsed time axis in the current segment which is an extended
straight line, the ramp set value of the current segment when the SP set value in
the previous segment is the start point.
The end point is the point where this line reaches the SP setpoint of the current
segment. Note that the RAMP-T system cannot be used in the first segment.
SP calculation: SP = θ set value × segment elapsed time + previous segment SP.
SP
SP setting of
current segment
setting
θ
SP of previous
segment
Unit time
(Set unit time using setup data C62 .)
Time
■ RAMP-E system (∆ SP setting)
In the RAMP-E system, segments are set using SP and ∆ SP (digital SP) for each
external switch input pulse.
SP setting : within the upper and lower SP limiter range
∆ SP setting: 1 to 10000 SPU
The start point is the SP set value in the previous segment.
SP is a value resulting from adding a multiple of the external switch input count to
the SP set value when the SP in the previous segment is the start point.
The segment ends when this SP reaches the SP setting in the current segment and
the current segment SP is more than the previous segment SP or when current
segment SP is less than the previous segment SP.
SP calculation: when current segment SP is more than the previous segment SP,
SP = ∆ SP set value × external switch input count + the previous segment SP.
When current segment SP is less than the previous segment SP,
SP = – (∆ SP set value × exernal switch input count) + the previous segment SP.
SP
Current segment SP setting
∆ SP setting
∆ SP setting
SP of previous
segment
Time
External switch input (1)
(2)
(Set external switch input using one of setups C71 to C74. )
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
NOTE
•Select the program pattern setting system using setup data setting C61.
0: combined use of RAMP-X and RAMP-T
1: combined use of RAMP-X and RAMP-E
•Select time setting units using setup data setting C62.
0: hours and minutes
1: minutes and seconds
2: 0.1 seconds
•Select θ setting units using setup data setting C62.
0: SPU/hour
1: SPU/min
2: SPU/sec
•Select SP setting and SP setting decimal position using setup data setting C65.
0: XXXXX
1: XXXX.X
2: XXX.XX
3: XX.XXX
4: X.XXXX
•External switch for pulse input requires 1: RAMP-E using a setup data setting
between C71 to C74.
•The pulse input interval time can be checked by setting event type 93 in the event.
Event type 93 is RAMP-E time monitored during a period of 0.0 to 3000.0
seconds.
Even when a setting is exceeded and there is no pulse input, the event remains on.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Events
First, setup data setting C64 is used to assign CH1 and CH2 events, then the event
configuration data setting is used to set event types for event outputs 1 to 16.
Events are of the following four types: time event, PV event, code event and mode
event. Settings are divided into two types of events: segment events and
instrument event.
•Segment events are used to set the event operating point in a program setting and
makes it possible to set different set values in different segments. But in the
constant value control mode segment events are off.
•Instrument events are used to set events that do not require an event operating
point or set the event operating point in the event configuration setting. It
performs operations that are shared by all program operations and constant value
control.
■ Time events
The On Time or both the On and Off Time can be set by event number and
segment. Output on/off duration are as shown below.
NOTE
•The On Time is indicated by the length of the line from the start of the
segment until the upturned arrow.
•The Off Time is indicated by the length of the line from the start of the
segment until the downturned arrow.
•When the On Time is less than the off time, the output is on from the on time
until the off time.
(See segments 1, 6 and 7 in the figure.)
Segment
On-time
1
ON<OFF
Off-time
Output-ON
Output-OFF
Time
•When only an on setting is made, the output stays on until the end of the segment.
(See segments 2 and 5 in the figure.)
Segment
On-time
2
3
The output goes off at the end of the
segment when no off time is set.
Off-time
Output-ON
Output-OFF
Time
•The output is off when no On or Off Time has been set.
•An off time cannot be set without setting an on time.
(See segment 3B in the figure.)
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
•An On Time ≥ Off Time setting cannot be made.
(See segment 3C in the figure.)
Segment
On-time
3B
3C
No On Time is set.
Off-time
ON=OFF ON>OFF
Output-ON
Output-OFF
Time
•An On Time or Off Time is valid only within a segment and cannot straddle
segments. In the next segment, the On time and Off time set for that segment are
valid. (See segments 4 and 5 in the figure.)
Thus an On Time and Off Time setting made at the end of a RAMP-X segment
are ignored. (Compare segment 9 with the G.SOAK wait in segment 10 in the
figure.)
Note, however, that an On Time or Off Time setting at the end of a RAMP-T
segment is either valid or invalid depending on the computational error.
Segment
On-time
4
5
Segment time
Off-time
An On or Off Time that is set to be
longer than the segment time
is not valid.
Output-ON
Output-OFF
Continues into segment 5.
Time
•When the On Time is set to 0 (no Off Time being set or set to more than 0), the
output goes on when the On Time becomes 0. If the output was on at the end of
the previous segment, it stays on and does not go off momentarily between the
two segments. (See segments 5 and 6 in the figure.)
Segment
On-time
5
6
ON=0
Off-time
Output-ON
Output-OFF
ON duration
Time
•The G.SOAK Time is not included in the On and Off Time. (See segment 7.)
Nor is the Wait Time included for a G.SOAK that occupies an entire segment.
Segment
On-time
7
G.SOAK wait
Off-time
Output-ON
Output-OFF
Segment start
Time
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
•When there is a G.SOAK wait at the start of a segment and the ON Time is set to
0, the output goes on at the start of the G.SOAK wait and the On Time starts as
the G.SOAK wait ends.
The output time = G.SOAK time + (Off Time – On Time) (See segment 8 in the
figure.)
Segment
On-time
8
G.SOAK wait
The output goes on at the start of
segment 8 when on is set to 0.
Start of segment 8
Off-time
Output-ON
Output-OFF
Time
•An On Time and Off Time occurring at the end of a RAMP-X segment are valid
when there is a G.SOAK wait at the end of a segment or as the end state of the
final segment. (See segment 10 in the figure.)
Note, however, that an On Time or Off Time setting at the end of a RAMP-T
segment is either valid or invalid depending on the computational error.
Segment
On-time
9
ON = Segment time
Off-time
Output-ON
Output-OFF
Segment
10
G.SOAK wait
Segment time
ON = Segment time
On-time
Off-time
Output-ON
Output-OFF
Time
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
•When there is a G.SOAK at the end of the previous segment, the On Time in the
next segment is ignored if it is set to 0. (See segments 11 and 12 in the figure.)
Thus the ON = 0 of segment 12 is not output at the end of the set time for
segment 11, but when the G.SOAK wait ends.
•This function can be combined with an event ON delay set using PARA. Delay
works when an event goes from off to on. A delay is not triggered when an On
Time continues across two segments as shown in segments 5 and 6 in the figure.
■ PV event
Segment
11
G.SOAK wait
Segment time
On-time
Off-time
Output-ON
Output-OFF
Segment
12
ON=0
On-time
Off-time
Output-ON
Output-OFF
Time
• Basic specifications
The difference between PV, deviation, absolute value deviation, SP and MV for
each event type is shown on the following pages. The thick lines show ON and
OFF conditions. The upper line indicates ON and the lower line indicates OFF
conditions.
EV indicates the event set value and H indicates the hysteresis value. Outputs in
READY mode are OFF. But normal PV1 upper and lower limit operation and
normal PV2 upper and lower limit operation events run also in the READY
mode.
• Event standby
Standby events operate as described below.
•If the event is in the gray area
shown in the figure during a change from
READY to RUN mode or when the power is restored after an outage, the event
operates without a standby. The upturned arrows in the figures indicate ON
while the downturned arrows indicate OFF.
•If the event is outside the gray area
from READY to RUN mode or when the power is restored after an outage, it
remains off until it enters the gray area
shown in the figure during a change
.
After entering the gray area , the upturned arrows in the figures indicate
ON while the downturned arrows indicate OFF.
A standby event is off in the READY mode.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
• Event on delay
The number of the event to be delayed and the delay time can be set regardless
of event type. The delay turns on the output for the duration of the delay when
the event meets the conditions for going from OFF to ON. When this function
is combined with the event standby function, the event on delay operates when
the standby state is cleared.
• Segment event progress
•The output stays OFF until the program reaches a segment with an event.
•The event goes ON or OFF according to the set value of the event.
•Previous settings are valid until segments with other event settings are reached.
•Previous settings are valid when the program has reached segment number 1
using the cycle function or pattern link function. The output is turned off if
there is no event in segment number 1.
• Other functions
Normal PV1 upper and lower limit operation event and normal PV2 upper and
lower limit operation events operate in the READY mode.
PV upper limit
Normal PV1 upper limit operation
Normal PV2 upper limit operation
PV lower limit
Normal PV1 lower limit operation
Normal PV2 lower limit operation
H
H
PV
PV
EV
EV
Deviation lower limit
Deviation lower limit with standby
Deviation upper limit
Deviation upper limit with standby
H
H
PV
PV
SP+EV
SP+EV
Absolute value deviation upper limit
Absolute value deviation lower limit
Absolute value deviation upper limit with standby
SOAK absolute value deviation upper limit*
Absolute value deviation lower limit with standby
SOAK absolute value deviation lower limit*
SOAK absolute value deviation upper limit with standby*
SOAK absolute value deviation lower limit with standby*
H
H
H
H
PV
PV
EV
EV
EV
EV
SP
Items marked * operate only in SOAK segments.
SP
Items marked * operate only in SOAK segments.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
SP lower limit
SP upper limit
H
H
H
H
SP
SP
EV
EV
MV lower limit
MV upper limit
MV
MV
EV
EV
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ PV deviation rate event
PV deviation is measured in each sampling cycle set using the event configuration
data setting while on/off states are determined by comparing event setting
deviation rate ∆PVs.
PV deviation between sampling cycles is ignored. Event on/off switching is
performed according to the sampling cycle. This function can be combined with
event on delay.
Set event value is more than 0 (using upper limit event)
PV
Set event value
Set event
value
Set event value
Time
Sampling cycle
PV deviation rate
upper limit event
operation
ON (up alarm)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
PV deviation rate
lower limit event
operation
Sampling (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Set event value is less than 0 (using lower limit event)
PV
Set event value
Set event value
Set event value
Time
Sampling cycle
PV deviation rate
upper limit event
operation
ON
ON
OFF
PV deviation rate
lower limit event
operation
ON (down alarm)
OFF
Sampling (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Code event
Several events are used as one group and the number of output points are output
as one parallel code number. Assigning code numbers to event outputs has the
same effect as increasing the number of physical output points.
•Code event
Set event type to code event and set the number of output points (1 to 8) in
auxiliary setting 1. An output code value (0 to 255) can be set for each segment.
A binary coded low-order bit for the set number of output points is output.
The previous setting is valid until the program reaches a segment with a new
setting.
Note, however, that unless a setting is made in the first segment, the program will
assume that a set value of 0 is set in the first segment.
Example: Setting a code event involving 3 output points in event 3
The table below shows the output state when a value of 3 is set in segment 2, a value of 6
is set in segment 4 and a value of 0 is set in segment 5.
1
2
3
3
4
6
5
0
Segment
Set value
Not set
Not set
Code value
1 in event 3
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Code value
2 in event 4
OFF
OFF
Code value
4 in event 5
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
3
3
6
0
0
OFF,ON,ON
0, 1, 1
OFF,ON,ON
0, 1, 1
ON,ON,OFF
1, 1,
OFF,OFF,OFF
0 , 0,
OFF,OFF,OFF
0, 0,
Output code
0
0
0
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
•Timed code event
This function is a combination of a code event and a time event. The set code
value is output at the set time. The number of settings that can be made in the first
segment is the same as the number of output points. For example, for a 3-point
output up to three settings can be made in the first segment.
Like a time eventit, a setting within the segment period is valid and those that
exceed it are ignored. When the program reaches the start time of the first
segment or a new segment, the set code value is 0 (all points off) until the set time
of the time event.
Example: Setting a timed code with 3 output points in event 3
The table below shows the output state when a value of 5 is set in segment 2 and set to start at the
beginning of the segment, a value of 3 is set to occur 0:10 after the start of segment 2 and a value
of 4 is set to occur 0:30 after the start of segment 4.
1
2
5
3
4
6
5
0
Segment
Set value
Not set
3
Not set
Set time
Time
Not set
0.00 0.10
Not set
0.30
0.00
0.30
OFF
0.10
Code value
1 in event 3
ON ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Code value
2 in event 4 OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Code value
4 in event 5
Output code
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
3
OFF,OFF,OFF *3
0, 0,
OFF
0
OFF
5
6
*4
0
3
0
*1
OFF,OFF,OFF
*2
OFF,OFF,OFF
0
0 , 0,
ON,ON,OFF
*4:
0
0,
0,
0
ON,OFF,ON
1, 0,
OFF,ON,ON
0, 1,
OFF,OFF,OFF
0,
*1:
*2:
*3:
1
1
0,
0
1, 1,
0
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
•Program/segment number event
A program or a binary coded segment number is set in an event type and the
number of output points (1 to 7) is set in auxiliary setting 1. Or a program or a
BCD code of the segment number is set in an event type and the number of output
points (1 to 8) is set in auxiliary setting 1.
A selection, a program designed for a specific operation or a coded segment
number is output. A low-order bit code corresponding to the set number of output
points is output.
•An event on delay can be combined with the code event.
Note, however, that when there are several channel code events, the delay has to
be entered for each channel.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Mode event
This event goes on or off depending on controller mode, alarm generation and
other states.
It cannot be combined with the event standby function but with the on delay
function. It does not set event set values (operating points) or hysteresis.
• Basic operations
The following types are provided.
RUN + HOLD + END + FAST
HOLD
READY + READY FAST
END
G.SOAK wait
MANUAL
During auto-turning execution
FAST + READY FAST
Console setting operation
RUN
ADV (advance)
Full alarm (logical OR)
PV range alarm
Instrument alarm
O2 sensor failure
Battery voltage drop
The event goes on when the specified instrument state is reached and is off at
other times.
• Alarm
Alarms are of two types: PV range alarm group (alarm code number 01 to 04)
and instrument alarm group (alarm code number 91 to 99 and battery voltage
drop). When the event type is all alarm, the event goes on if one alarm occurs.
When the event type is a PV range alarm, the event goes on if one alarm in the
PV range alarm group goes on.
When the event type is an instrument alarm, the event goes on if one alarm in
the instrument alarm group goes on.
• ADV
When ADV (advance) is executed, the event goes on for 1 second. This
function is valid during on delay.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ PID group selection
•Separate PID group selections can be set in CH1 and CH2 programs.
•PID groups can be selected in two ways: by setting a PID segment or through
automatic PID group switching.
A PID group segment and automatic PID group switching can also be combined.
When a PID group number is set to 0, the setting in the previous segment is
continued.
SP
Time
PID group number
1
2
3
4
PID group segment setting
•In a PID group segment setting a PID group number is set in each segment and
PID parameters are used for calculating the control output. The nine PID groups
PID1 to PID9 can be used.
•In automatic PID group switching, the entire SP scale is divided into seven zones
assigning CP-A1 to CP-A6 to each. The PID constants that are used according to
SP values are automatically selected to calculate control output. The PID group
number for each segment specifies A. Seven PID groups from PID-A1 to PID-A7
can be used.
SP
Zone 7
CP-A6
Zone 6
CP-A5
Zone 5
Zone 4
Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone 1
Entire SP range is
divided into seven zones.
CP-A4
CP-A3
CP-A2
CP-A1
■ Selection of ouput limiter group
•Separate output limiter groups can be set in CH1 and CH2 programs.
•Output limiter group number can be set for each segment to control the lower
limit (OL) and upper limit (OH) of the control output. oL and oH groups 1 to 9
can be used.
•The output limiter can only be specified by segment; automatic selection cannot
be made.
•When the output limiter is set to 0, the setting in the previous segment is
continued.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ G.SOAK (Guarantee soak)
Separate G.SOAK settings can be made in CH1 and CH2 programs.
G.SOAK on/off state, type and G.SOAK width is set by the segment. G.SOAK are
of three types: segment start point, segment end point and the entire segment.
G.SOAK time is set using the variable parameter PA46 setting. Any offset
between SP and PV triggers a G.SOAK wait which narrows the distance between
SP and PV to guarantee the segment execution time. G.SOAK operates not only
on SOAK but also on RAMP segments.
Note, however, that in FAST mode a G.SOAK setting does not trigger a G.SOAK
wait.
When a G.SOAK wait occurs in one channel in sync mode (variable parameter
PA04 is set to 1), the program in the other channel is halted.
G.SOAK can be cleared with an external switch input. The following types of
clearing conditions can be selected using setup data setting C71 to C74.
(1) G.SOAK is cleared when an external switch contact is set to on or when PV
meets the G.SOAK clearing conditions.
(2) G.SOAK is cleared when an external switch contact is set to on and PV meets
the G.SOAK clearing conditions.
• G.SOAK at start of segment
PV and SP are compared at the beginning of the segment. The segment starts
when the absolute value of the difference continues beyond the G.SOAK time
and becomes narrower than G.SOAK width.
A G.SOAK wait state continues until these conditions are met which is
announced by the flashing of the linear LED on the left of the profile display.
The operating condition is the same as HOLD at the beginning of a segment
(time = 0).
SP
G.SOAK
width
SP
G.SOAK
width
PV
Segment
setting time
Segment
executing time
G.SOAK wait time
Time
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
• G.SOAK at end of segment
PV and SP are compared at the end of the segment. The operation in that
segment ends when the absolute value continues beyond the G.SOAK time and
becomes narrower than G.SOAK width.
A G.SOAK wait state continues until these conditions are met which is
announced by the flashing of the linear LED at the center of the profile display.
The operating condition is the same as HOLD at the end of a segment (time =
set segment time).
SP
G. SOAK
width
G. SOAK
width
SP
Segment
setting time
PV
G.SOAK wait time
Time
• G.SOAK for entire segment
PV and SP are compared at across the entire segment. The operation in that
segment continues when the absolute value continues beyond the G.SOAK time
and becomes narrower than G.SOAK width.
A G.SOAK wait state continues until these conditions are met which is
announced by the flashing of the linear LED at the left and the center of the
profile display.
The operating condition is the same as HOLD at the continued time.
■ PV shift
Separate PV shift settings can be made in CH1 and CH2 programs.
A PV correction value can be set for each segment. PV is PV input value plus PV
bias and PV shift. Note, however, that in the READY mode and the constant value
control mode, PV bias but not PV shift is added to the PV input value.
The setting in the previous segment continues when PV shift is set to “-----”
(nothing).
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Repeat
Separate repeat settings can be made in CH1 and CH2 programs.
Repeat on/off and return destination are set by the segment with the segment
number and repeat count. Operation completes at the end of a segment. If there is a
repeat setting, the program returns to the start of the set destination segment and
operation is resumed from there. This operation is repeated the number of times
specified by the repeat count.
Segment
4
Segment
1
Segment
2
Segment
3
No repeat is performed when the destination segment number is larger than the
current segment number. When the program returns to the first segment, PV is not
started even if a PV start setting has been made.
Handling Precautions
•When repeat operations involve multiple segments and the destination
segment settings overlap, nest or intersect, the repeat operation will
become an abnormal eternal loop. Do not make such settings.
Segment
3
Segment
1
Segment
2
Segment
3
Segment
4
Segment Segment
1
2
Example of a double
Example of a nest
Segment
3
Segment
1
Segment
2
Segment
3
Segment
4
Segment
1
Segment
2
Intersect example (1)
Intersect example (2)
•When the current segment does not contain a set value or the value is 0,
executed values for program items (for example, set PV event values or
set PID group selection values) that are sequels to settings in a previous
segment are the same during the first run and the repeat run.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ PV start
Separate PV start settings can be made in CH1 and CH2 programs.
When a PV start is set in the program setting, a PV start is performed in a normal
RUN operation.
The program looks for the first point where PV and the program pattern SP are
equal (both PV and SP include bias) and starts operation from there. PV starts are
of three kinds: rising PV start that looks for a point where PV and SP are equal on
a rising RAMP, falling PV start that looks for a point where PV and SP are equal
on a falling RAMP and bi-directional PV start that looks for such a point both on
rising and falling RAMPs.
Note, however, that if there is no point where PV and SP are equal, operation
starts from the beginning of segment 1.
When a PV start has been implemented, the event operating point and the time
event time are automatically corrected. This is described in the figure shown
below. When PV is at (1) in the figure, a rising PV start or a bi-directional PV start
starts from B and a falling PV start starts from C. When PV is at (2) in the figure, a
falling PV start or a bi-directional PV start starts from D and a rising PV start
starts from A. When PV is at (3) in the figure, any PV start starts from A.
SP pattern
SP
Current PV value
C
B
(1)
A
D
(2)
(3)
Time
NOTE
PV start is valid for segments in the selected program but not for segments beyond
a pattern link destination.
When a PV start is performed in one or both channels of a program whose both
channels have the same segment time settings, the segment number and operating
progress time of the two channels do not match.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Cycle
Separate cycles can be set in CH1 and CH2 programs.
The cycle function allows you to repeat operation from segment 1 to the last
segment in a program pattern the number of times set in the cycle count. A total of
10,000 times can be set.
When a cycle number of n is set, the total operation count is n + 1. During cycle
operation, the operation at the last point in the final segment is not performed and
executed values of program items (sequels to settings in the previous segment ; for
example, PV event value, pid group number) that continue from a previous
segment are cleared before program restart.
When the SP start point and end point are not equal, SP changes in a step-like
manner during cycle operation.
SP
Cycle 1
(5)
(4)
(3)
(6)
(2)
(1)
Time
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Pattern link
Separate pattern links can be made in CH1 and CH2 programs.
The pattern link function links patterns; the program number of the link at the
destination is set in the pattern link item. An initial value of 0 indicates that linking
is not performed.
When the number of the program is set in the pattern link item, it forms an eternal
loop.
When SP at the end of the original link and SP at the destination are not equal, SP
changes in a step-like manner.
When cycle operation has been set, the pattern link operates after the cycle
operation has been completed.
Since operation starts from the first segment at the destination during pattern
linking, executed values of program items (sequels to settings in the previous
segment) that continue from a previous segment are cleared before program
restart.
When a PV start has been programmed in a pattern at the destination link, the PV
start function operates after the link has been made.
PID computations are not initialized but continued after a link has been
established.
When the READY mode is invoked at the end of an operation or in a RESET
operation, operation returns to program number 1 that is switched from READY to
RUN mode (RUN to READY). If a RESET is performed when a program at the
pattern link destination is reached during an ADV operation in the READY mode,
operation returns to segment 1 of the link destination program number. Note,
however, that program numbers selected using the external switch takes priority.
Linking program No. 1 and program No. 2
SP
Program No.1
Time
SP
Program No.2
Time
SP
Time
Program No.1
Program No.2
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Tag
Programs that have the same number in CH1 and CH2 also share the same tag.
Tags are 8-character alphanumerics, katakana or symbols that can be entered in a
program.
When segment 1 pattern item is set in a program setting, a total of eight characters
consisting of PROG plus two characters in the program number and “__” two
space characters.
Example: Program No. 1 : “PROG01__”
Program No. 19 : “PROG19__”
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
5 - 3
Mode
■ Mode types
Modes are listed below.
Mode
Program operation
READY
AUTO
MANUAL
AUTO
READY FAST
MANUAL
AUTO
RUN
MANUAL
AUTO
HOLD
FAST
MANUAL
AUTO
MANUAL
AUTO
END
MANUAL
AUTO
Constant value
control
READY
RUN
MANUAL
AUTO
MANUAL
■ Program operation
The program is run according to SP, time, events and other settings made in
program patterns 1-49.
■ Constant value control
The control is run according to SP and events made with the constant value control
data.
■ READY
READY indicates that the program is ready to run.
MV becomes fixed and events whose operation depends on values set in the
segments are turned off. Note, however, that DCP552 state dependent events still
run.
Program numbers between 1 to 49 and set segment numbers can be selected during
program operation.
All setup data, some event configuration data and some constant value control data
parameters can be changed in the READY mode.
Memory cards can also be used in the READY mode
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ RUN
The RUN mode indicates that the program is run sequentially.
MV output and events operate during PID control, ON-OFF control and other
types of control. In the program RUN mode, program operation progresses
according as time elapses. Note, however, that G.SOAK (guarantee soak) wait,
like the HOLD mode, halts program operation.
■ HOLD
The HOLD mode temporarily halts program operation.
Note, however, that, like the RUN mode, MV output and events operate during
PID operation, ON-OFF control and other types of control. During constant value
control the HOLD mode cannot be invoked.
■ FAST
The FAST mode is essentially a speeded-up version of the RUN mode. The time
factor is selected using variable parameter PA39. MV output and events operate
during PID control, ON-OFF control and other types of control. G.SOAK
(guarantee soak) settings are ignored.
During constant value control the FAST mode cannot be invoked.
■ END
The END mode indicates the state of a program that has run its course.
When a program stops at the end, MV output and events operate during PID
control, ON-OFF control and other types of control.
During constant value control the END mode cannot be invoked.
■ READY FAST
The READY FAST mode is a combination of the READY and FAST modes.
MV output, SP output and events operate in the same way as in the READY mode.
Program numbers and segment numbers cannot be selected. Parameters that can
only be changed in the READY mode and memory card operation cannot be
performed in this mode.
During constant value control the READY FAST mode cannot be invoked.
■ AUTO
The AUTO mode performs automatic operation. MV outputs can be used
depending on DCP552 control.
■ MANUAL
The MANUAL mode performs manual operation.
The “↑”, “↓”, “←” and “→” console keys can be used to change communications
and MV output.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Mode transitions
■ Program operation
Mode transitions are indicated by the solid line arrows and end operation is
indicated by the dashed lines in the figure below.
ADV
RESET
ADV
ADV
RUN
RESET
HOLD
RUN
END AUTO
END MANUAL
RESET
READY AUTO
READY MANUAL
RUN AUTO
RUN MANUAL
HOLD AUTO
HOLD MANUAL
FAST
FAST
RESET
READY FAST AUTO
FAST
HOLD
RUN
RUN
FAST AUTO
FAST MANUAL
RESET
READY FAST MANUAL
ADV
ADV
NOTE
•AUTO ↔ MANUAL mode changes can be made in the boxes of each mode.
•READY and END at the end of operation can be selected using setup data
C31.
•CH1 and CH2 mode transitions can be performed both synchronously or
asynchronously.
■ Constant value control
Mode transitions are indicated by the solid line arrows.
RUN
READY AUTO
READY MANUAL
RUN AUTO
RUN MANUAL
RESET
NOTE
•AUTO ↔ MANUAL mode changes can be made in the boxes of each mode.
•CH1 and CH2 mode transitions can be performed both synchronously or
asynchronously.
■ Switching between program operation and constant value control
Constant value control data “ConSt ” control mode item in the READY mode is
used to switch between these two modes.
0: Program operation
1: Constant value control
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Mode transition operations
Mode transitions are performed using the following operations.
Although “Operation end” is not an operation, it is described here as a factor in
mode transitions.
■ RUN
Switches from the READY, HOLD, FAST and READY FAST modes to the RUN
mode. To go from the READY mode or READY FAST to the RUN mode using
keys, external switches or transmission, the DCP552 must be in basic display
status.
■ HOLD
Switches from the RUN and FAST modes to the HOLD mode. During constant
value control the HOLD mode cannot be invoked.
■ RESET
Switches from the RUN, HOLD, FAST, END and READY FAST modes to the
READY mode.
In program operation, the reset involves returning the program to the first segment.
■ ADV
Brings the program forward by one segment in the READY, RUN, HOLD, FAST
and READY FAST modes. ADV (advance) operation is not available in the
constant value control mode.
■ FAST
The FAST mode is invoked from the RUN, HOLD, READY and READY FAST
modes. During constant value control the FAST mode cannot be invoked.
■ AUTO
Switches from the MANUAL mode to AUTO mode.
■ MANUAL
Switches from the AUTO mode to MANUAL mode.
The basic display status shows PV and the output value (%) during this transition.
Switching from AUTO to MANUAL using external switches or transmission
invokes the basic display status even when the parameter setting status or
programmer setting status are in use.
■ Operation end
Operation ends when all progress of program settings including cycle and pattern
links reach the end in the RUN, FAST and READY FAST program operation
modes or during an ADV operation. By making a setup selection, it is possible to
set READY or END as the state of the controller when the program reaches its
end.
Note, however, that when an operation ends in the READY FAST mode, it always
ends in the READY mode. In constant value control mode, operation end is not
available.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Mode transition restrictions
Modes can be changed using console keys, external switch inputs or through
communications. The table below shows the operations that are valid for each
mode.
Operation
RUN
To RUN mode
HOLD
RESET
ADV
FAST
(To FAST or
(
)
(To RUN mode) (To READY mode) (To next segment)
READY FAST mode)
Key Switch Commu- Key Switch Commu- Key Switch Commu- Key Switch Commu- Key Switch Commu-
nication
nication
nication
nication*
nication
Original mode
Program
operation
READY
■
■
■
■
–
–
–
–
∆
■
■
–
■
■
–
■
■
■
■
■
■
RUN
–
–
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
HOLD
FAST
END
■
■
–
■
■
–
■
■
–
–
–
–
–
–
■
–
■
■
–
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
–
■
■
–
■
■
–
■
–
■
–
■
■
–
–
–
READY
FAST
■
■
■
–
–
■
■
■
–
–
■
Constant
value
control
READY
■
■
■
■
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
■
■
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
RUN
–
–
■
■
■ : Valid operation
■ : Operation from basic display status
valid
Operation
MANUAL
(To MANUAL mode)
AUTO
(To AUTO mode)
∆
: Returns to the first segment remaining
in the READY mode.
Key Switch Communication Key Switch Communication
Original mode
Program AUTO
operation
■
■
■
■
■
■
—
—
■
■
■
■
■ : Operation is invalid, but the
communication end code is normal if
performed in the basic display status.
MANUAL
—
—
■
■
Constant
value
control
AUTO
■
■
—
—
MANUAL
—
—
■
■
–
: Invalid operation
* ADV operation performed via communications may not go to the next segment
but to the segment set in the communications message.
Handling Precautions
•Mode transitions can be simultaneously performed for both CH1 and CH2
under the following conditions.
•When key operations are performed in synchronous mode (PA04=1).
•Switch operations performed when both the CH1 operation cancel
switch (SW15) and the CH2 operation cancel switch (SW16) are set to
OFF.
•When a write command is used to communicate with 2001 status 1
(CH1 and CH2).
•Mode transitions can be simultaneously performed for either CH1 or CH2
under the following conditions.
•
When key operations are performed in asynchronous mode (PA04=0).
Switch operations performed when either the CH1 operation cancel switch
(SW15) or the CH2 operation cancel switch (SW16) is set to ON.
•
•When a write command is used to communicate with 261 status 1
(CH1) or 281W status 1 (CH2).
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
5 - 4
Input Process Functions
This section uses diagrams to describe input processes.
■ Model without carbon potential (CP) compensation
Analog input 1
Input range type
A/D conversion
Analog input 2
Input range type
A/D conversion
Setting: setup data C01
Setting: setup data C11
(For resistance temperature detector)
(For resistance temperature detector)
Wiring resistance compensation
Cold junction compensation
Square-root extraction
Upper and lower limit value scaling
Temperature unit range
Wiring resistance compensation
Cold junction compensation
Square-root extraction
Upper and lower limit value scaling
Temperature unit range
(For thermocouple)
Setting: setup data C07, C10
(For thermocouple)
Setting: setup data C17, C20)
(For DC current or voltage)
Setting: setup data C08, C09
(For DC current or voltage)
Setting: setup data C18, C19
(For DC current or voltage)
Setting: setup data C04 to C06
(For DC current or voltage)
Setting: setup data C14 to C16
(For thermocouple or resistance temperature detector)
Setting: setup data C02, C03
(For thermocouple or resistance temperature detector)
Setting: setup data C12, C13
Upper and lower limit alarm
Upper and lower limit alarm
Equalizer (approximation
by linearization table)
Equalizer (approximation
by linearization table)
Setting: setup data C30
Setting: setupdata C30
Variable parameters PA51 to PA70
Variable parameters PA71 to PA90
Setting: variable parameter PA13
Setting: variable parameter PA23
Bias
Bias
Setting: program setting PV shift item
Setting: PV shift item in program setting
PV shift
Digital filter
PV (PV1)
PV shift
Digital filter
PV2
Setting: variable parameter PA12
Setting: variable parameter PA22
NOTE
The use of equalizer (approximation by linearization table) is shown in the figure
below.
When a sensor with curved characteristics is used to measure PV, a linearization
table is used.
PV input (sensor output)
No.10
Correction point no.10
Correction point no. 9
Correction point no. 8
No.9
No.8
No.7
Correction point no. 7
Correction point no. 6
No.6
No.5
Correction point no. 5
Correction point no. 4
No.4
No.3
No.2
Correction point no. 3
Correction point no. 2
Correction point no. 1
Actual PV
No.1
: (right facing arrow) indicates negative correction.
: (left facing arrow) indicates positive correction.
: (bullet) indicates 0 correction.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Model with carbon potential (CP) compensation
Analog input 1
Input range type
A/D conversion
Analog input 2
A/D conversion
mV range
Setting : setup data C01
(For resistance temperature detector)
Wiring resistance compensation
Cold junction compensation
Square-root extraction
Upper and lower limit value scaling
Temperature unit range
Upper and lower limit alarm
Equalizer (approximation
by linearization table)
Setting: setup data C30
(For thermocouple)
Setting: setup data C07, C10
Variable parameters PA71 to PA90
(For DC current and voltage)
Setting: setup data C08, C09
Setting: variable parameter PA23
Bias
(For DC current and voltage)
Setting: setup data C04 to C06
(For thermocouple and resistance temperature detector)
Setting: setup data C02, C03
Upper and lower limit alarm
Equalizer (approximation
by linearization table)
Setting: setup data C30
Variable parameters PA51 to PA70
Setting: variable parameter PA22
Setting: variable parameter PA13
Bias
Digital filter
mV value
Setting: program setting PV shift item
PV shift
Digital filter
PV1
Setting: variable parameter PA12
Setting: variable parameter PA40
Temperature compensation
Setting: setup data C44
CP or PO2 computation
variable parameters PA98 to PA100
Setting: PV shift item
in program setting
PV shift
Compensation
(approximation by linearization)
Setting: variable parameters PA97,
and PA101 to PA120
PV2
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ O2 sensor check (model with CP compensation)
■ Objective
As the O2 sensor starts to deteriorate, its output impedance increases. This function
checks sensor output impedance and turns on the O2 sensor error event when the
impedance exceeds 130kΩ.
■ Setting
•One of the values set for setup data C71 to C74 is set to 11 to assign the O2
sensor check to an external switch.
•One of the values set for event configuration data setting E01-t to E16-t is set to
142 to assign an O2 sensor error event.
■ Operation
•Two methods are used to perform an O2 sensor check. In one method the external
switch which has been assigned the O2 sensor check function goes from OFF to
ON. This is called a constant check.
•The other method the external switch is turned on each 24-hour period. This is
called an automatic check.
•The impedance is checked when PV1 is 800 °C or more and the O2 input is
1000mV or higher.
•The O2 sensor error event goes on when sensor impedance exceeds 130k;Ω
otherwise it remains off.
•The constant check method is shown below.
•The automatic check method is shown below.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
5 - 5
Output Processing Functions
■ Control output CH1
Control output CH1 is processed as shown below.
■ Current output (with setup data C21 set to 1)
Initialization of PID
control computation
Setting: variable parameter PA17, PA43
Setting: PID parameter P / l / d / rE (for CH1)
PID control computation
Setup data C23
Setting: variable parameter PA14
Output deviation limiter
Setting: PID parameter oL / oH (for CH1)
Upper and lower output limiter
Setting: variable parameter PA16
ON-OFF control computation
PID parameter oL / oH (for CH1)
During ON-OFF control
Setting: variable parameter PA08, PA09, PA10
AT computation
AT executed
Setting: setup data C33, C34
Setting: setup data C32
Manipulated variable during overrange
During overrange
Manipulated variable in READY mode
In READY mode
Setting: setup data C35, C36
Preset MANUAL value
MANUAL Manipulated variable
In MANUAL mode
Manipulated variable (MV1)
Output 1
Proportional current output: 4 to 20mA
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Voltage, Open collector output (with setup data C21 set between 2 to 5)
Initialization of PID
control computation
Setting: variable parameter PA17, PA43
Setting: PID paramete P / l / d / rE (for CH1)
Setup data C23
PID control computation
Output deviation limiter
Upper and lower output limiter
Setting: variable parameter PA14
Setting: PID parameter oL / oH (for CH1)
Setting: variable parameter PA16
ON-OFF control computation
(PID parameter oL, oH are valid when setup
data C21 is set to 3 or 5.)
During ON-OFF control
Setting: variable parameter PA08, PA09, PA10
(Variable parameter PA09 and PA10 are valid
when setup data C21 is set to 3 or 5,
respectively.)
AT computation
During AT executing
Setting: setup data C33, C34
Manipulated variable during overrange
During overrange
Setting: setup data C32
Manipulated variable in READY mode
In READY mode
Setting: setup data C35, C36
Preset MANUAL value
MANUAL Manipulated variable
In MANUAL mode
Manipulated variable (MV1)
Setting: variable parameter PA15
Setup data C93
(ON-OFF control and AT execution are valid
Output 1 time proportional
output cycle
when setup data C21 is set to 2 or 4, respectively.)
(During 6D output)
Setting: setup data C95
Output voltage 1 control
Output 1
Voltage time proportional output
Proportional output when open collector is on
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Control output CH2
Control output CH2 is processed as shown below.
■ 5G output (with setup data C22 set to 1)
Initialization of PID
control computation
Setting: variable parameter PA27, PA96
Setting: PID parameter P / l / d / rE (for CH2)
Setup data C24
PID control computation
Setting: variable parameter PA24
Output deviation limiter
Setting: PID parameter oL / oH (for CH2)
Upper and lower output limiter
Setting: variable parameter PA26
ON-OFF control computation
PID parameter oL / oH (for CH2)
During ON-OFF control
Setting: variable parameter PA93, PA94, PA95
AT computation
(AT not performed during CH2 O2 sensor input)
AT executed
Setting: setup data C39, C40
Setting: setup data C38
Manipulated variable during overrange
During overrange
Manipulated variable in READY mode
In READY mode
Setting: setup data C41, C42
Preset MANUAL value
MANUAL Manipulated variable
In MANUAL mode
Manipulated variable (MV2)
Output 2
Proportional current output: 4 to 20mA
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Voltage, Open collector output (with setup data C22 set between 2 to 5)
Initialization of PID
control computation
Setting: variable parameter PA27, PA96
Setting: PID paramete P / l / d / rE (for CH2)
Setup data C24
PID control computation
Output deviation limiter
Upper and lower output limiter
Setting: variable parameter PA24
Setting: PID parameter oL / oH (for CH2)
Setting: variable parameter PA26
ON-OFF control computation
(PID parameter oL, oH are valid when setup
data C22 is set to 3 or 5.)
During ON-OFF control
Setting: variable parameter PA93, PA94, PA95
(Variable parametesr PA94 and PA95 are valid
when setup data C22 is set to 3 or 5, respectively.)
(AT not performed during CH2 O2 sensor input)
AT computation
During AT executing
Setting: setup data C39, C40
Manipulated variable during overrange
During overrange
Setting: setup data C38
Manipulated variable in READY mode
In READY mode
Setting: setup data C41, C42
Preset MANUAL value
MANUAL Manipulated variable
In MANUAL mode
Manipulated variable (MV2)
Setting: variable parameter PA25
Setup data C94
(not valid during ON-OFF control and AT execution or
Proportional output cycle
during output 2
when setup data C22 is set to 2 or 4.)
Output voltage 2
adjustment
(For 6D output)
Setting: setup data C96
Voltage time proportional output
Proportional output when open collector is on
Output 2
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Auxiliary output
■ Auxiliary output 1
Auxiliary output 1 is processed as shown below by a model with one or two
auxiliary output channels.
Setting: setup data C45
Auxiliary output 1 type
Setting: setup data C46, C47
Upper and lower limit scaling
¥When the auxiliary output type is SP
or deviation in the READY mode.
4mA
Current output 4 to 20mA
Auxiliary output 1
■ Auxiliary output 2
Auxiliary output 2 is processed as shown below on a model with two auxiliary
output channels.
Setting: setup data C48
Auxiliary output 2 type
Setting: setup data C49, C50
Upper and lower limit scaling
¥When the auxiliary output type is SP
or deviation in the READY mode.
4mA
Current output 4 to 20mA
Auxiliary output 2
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
6 - 1
Power Supply On
When 100 to 240V AC is applied across terminals (39) and (40) on the DCP552, the display goes on in about 10
seconds and controls and other operations start. When the controller is starting up, the LEDs on the profile display
go on at irregular intervals one after the other starting from top right in clock-wise order until the controller
becomes ready for operation.
The startup flow procedure is shown below.
● Startup flow procedure
Power on
NO
Is RAM backup normal ?
YES
Check start of general reset.
Press the ENTER key.
YES
YES
Parameters are reset to default values.
All programs are cleared.
Program run mode
READY mode
AUTO mode
Is setup data C43 set to 0?
NO
Was the power outage
(seconds) shorter than the
setup data C43 setting?
The program is reset to segment
number 1 in program number 1.
Segment advancing time = 0
*
NO
In RUN or FAST mode, the AUTO
or MANUAL mode is invoked.
READY, RUN, HOLD,FAST, END and
READY FAST modes continue operating.
READY, HOLD, END and READY
FAST modes continue operating.
Program operation and fixed command control continue operating.
AUTO and MANUAL modes continue operating.
(In MANUAL mode, numeric entries remain intact.)
Program and segment numbers remain unchanged.
Segment progress time remains unchanged.
In AUTO mode, display numbers in the basic display status remain unchanged.
Auto tuning is interrupted.
A G.SOAK wait is initialized.
A PID computation is initialized.
Event output status is initialized.
Changes between setting display status and basic display status.
Start of operation
*: The measurement of a power outage may vary by about 10 seconds.
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
6 - 2
Basic Display Selection
The console basic display status is comprised of the program number display, segment number display, display
panel 1, display panel 2, basic display LEDs and the message panel.
Use the DISP key or MESSAGE key to cycle through the different displays. The mode display LEDs perform
the same functions both in the basic display status and during parameter settings and do not change by pressing the
DISP or MESSAGE key.
The displays and their functions are shown in the figure below.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
● Program run mode displays
● DISP key function (When variable parametar PA03 is set to 0)
The DISP key is used to cycle through the displays in the following order: Display
A1, display A2, display A3, display A4, display A5, display A6, display A1.
● Display A1
● Display A2
● Display A3
When used in MANUAL mode, the number of digits available for output values
flashes.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
● Display A4
Select Hours and Minutes, Minutes and Seconds or 0.1 Seconds in the time unit
setup data. In the setup data, also select Remaining Segment Time or Total
Running Time.
● Display A5
When the remaining number of cycles is 0, cycle operation stops.
● Display A6
Select Hours and Minutes, Minutes and Seconds or 0.1 Seconds in the time unit
setup data. In the setup data, also select Remaining Segment Time or Total
Running Time.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
● DISP key function (when variable parameter PA03 is set to 1)
Cycles through display B1 → display B2 → display B3 → display B4 → display
B5 display B6 → display B1 →· · ·
● Display B1
● Display B2
● Display B3
When used in MANUAL mode, the number of digits available for output values
flashes.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
● Display B4
When the remaining number of cycles is 0, cycle operation stops.
● Display B5
● Display B6
Select Hours and Minutes, Minutes and Seconds or 0.1 Seconds in the time unit
setup data. In the setup data, also select Remaining Segment Time or Total
Running Time.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
● Message key function (when variable parameter PA03 is set to 0)
Cycles through the message panel displays.
• When CH1 is displayed: Display C1, display C2, display C3, display C4,
display C5, display C6, display C1.
• When CH2 is displayed: Display C1, display C2, display C3, display C4,
display C5, display C6, display C1.
● Display C1
● Display C2
● Display C3
● Display C4
● Display C5
● Display C6
● Display C7
●●●●●●●
●●●
●
●
●●
●
Handling Precautions
• Models with CP computation compensation the CH2 PV values have
the following meaning depending on variable parameter PA44 settings.
•
When PA44 is set to 0: CP value (unit: %) or PO2 values (unit 10-20 atm)
• When PA44 is set to 1: millivolt voltage value (unit: mV)
• When PA44 is set to 2: O2 sensor impedance value (unit: kΩ)
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
● Message key function (when variable parameter PA03 is set to 1)
Cycles through the message panel displays.
• Display D1, display D2, display D3, display D4, display D5, display D6,
display D1.
● Display D1
● Display D2
● Display D3
● Display D4
● Display D5
● Display D6
●
●●
●
Handling Precautions
• Models with CP computation compensation the CH2 PV values have
the following meaning depending on variable parameter PA44 settings.
•
When PA44 is set to 0: CP value (unit: %) or PO2 values (unit 10-20 atm)
• When PA44 is set to 1: millivolt voltage value (unit: mV)
• When PA44 is set to 2: O2 sensor impedance value (unit: kΩ)
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
● Constant value control mode
● DISP key function (when variable parameter PA03 is set to 0)
The DISP key is used to cycle through the displays in the following order: Display
E1, display E2, display E3, display E1.
● Display E1
● Display E2
● Display E3
In MANUAL mode, the number of digits available for output values flash.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
● DISP key function (when variable parameter PA03 is set to 1)
The DISP key is used to cycle through the displays in the following order:
Display F1, display F2, display F3, display F4, display F1.
When CH1 and CH2 are both in the fixed command control mode, the display
show the information shown in the figures below. When only one channel is in the
fixed command control mode, the displays provide the same information is shown
in the program run mode. Note, however, that channel time and remaining cycle
count are displayed as [-----].
● Display F1
● Display F2
● Display F3
When used in MANUAL mode, the number of digits available for output values
flashes.
● Display F4
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
6 - 3
Selecting Programs
A total of 49 programs can be selected with the operation keys.
● Selecting program numbers
→
←
↑ ↓
↑ ↓
← →
← →
• Press the PROG key in the READY program run mode and basic display
status. The program number starts to flash.
• Press the PROG key when the program or segment number starts flashing to
cycle through set program numbers when several programs have been set. The
segment number is set to 1.
• Use the ↑ or ↓ key when the program number is flashing to select a program
number regardless of whether a program has been set or not. The segment
number is set to 1.
• Use the ↑ or ↓ key when the segment number is flashing to select a segment
number. When no program has been set, only 1 can be selected. When a
program has been set, any of the set segments can be selected.
• The message panel displays the program tag when a program or segment
number flashes. The 8-character tag display is off when no program has been
set.
• Press the RUN key to start RUN mode operation from the displayed segment
number when the program or segment number is flashing.
Handling Precautions
• Programs cannot be selected during external switch input.
• Selections cannot be made in fixed command control mode, RUN,
HOLD, END and READY FAST modes.
• When variable parameter PA04 is set to 0, separate program numbers
can be selected for CH1 and CH2 using the keys. When variable
parameter PA04 is set to 1, only the same program number can be set
for CH1 and CH2 using the keys.
• When variable parameter PA04 is set to 1, the RUN mode can be
invoked with the RUN key only when a program with the selected
number is set both in CH1 and CH2.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
6 - 4
External Switch Operation
● External switch input
A total of 16 external switch inputs are available. Each input is called SW1, SW2,
etc. up to SW16. (SW: external switch input)
● Types of external switch inputs
SW1 to 4 and SW9 to 16 are tied.
SW5 to 8 functions are selected using setup data settings C71 to C74.
SW9 to 14 are for program selections. Selections are made by entering BCD code
or binary codes in the setup data C75. When two weights are given for an item,
the right weight is for binary figures and the left is for BCD.
NOTE
• When G.SOAK is cleared using an OR condition and an external switch is on,
or PV enters the G.SOAK width, a G.SOAK wait is cleared.
• When G.SOAK is cleared using an AND condition and an external switch is on
and PV enters the G.SOAK width, a G.SOAK wait is cleared.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
• The on and off states of SW15 and SW16 determine whether external SW1 to
SW14 operations are enabled or disabled. Note, however, that the autoload
function and the O2 sensor check function cannot be disabled by SW15 and
SW16.
● Selecting programs
• Programs can be selected using the external switches in the READY program
run mode.
• Programs are selected using the external switches and the BCD system or the
binary system, and are set in setup data C75. In the BCD system, four switches
SW9 to 12 are used to set the one digit and the two switches SW13 to 14 are
used to set the ten digit. In the binary system, six switches SW9 to 14 are used
to set. Settings made with these systems are shown in the tables below.
● BCD system
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
● Binary system
Handling Precautions
• When a program number of 0 is set using the external switch inputs,
programs can be selected using the console keys and by transmission.
• Program numbers 1 to 39 can be selected in the BCD system.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
● Read timing
● SW1 to 8 and 15 to 16 timing
SW1 to 8 and 15 to 16 are read according to the timing in the figure shown below.
(1) When the input changes from OFF to ON, reading starts within less than 0.2
seconds.
(2) When the input changes from ON to OFF, reading starts within less than 0.2
seconds.
● SW9 to 14 and RUN, FAST (READY FAST) timing
Selecting SW9 to 14 program numbers takes less than 0.4 seconds after a change
in input status.
Thus the following timings (1) to r must be observed during RUN operations.
FAST (READY FAST) operations should follow the same timings.
(1) Time from number selection to leading edge of the RUN signal
:0.4 seconds or more
(2) Time from the leading edge of the RUN signal to number selection hold
:0.2 seconds or more
(3) Time from RUN signal OFF to leading edge of RUN signal
:0.2 seconds or more
(4) Time from leading edge of RUN signal to RUN signal ON hold
:0.2 seconds or more
(5) Time from entry of selected number to program number change
:0.4 seconds or less
(6) Time from leading edge of RUN signal to start of RUN signal
:0.4 seconds or less
Handling Precautions
To ensure correct operation, the above read timings should be regarded as
minimum time settings in external switch operations.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
6 - 5
Manual Operation and Auto-Tuning
● Manual operation
When outputs are indicated in the basic display status, only one digit in the output
value flashes. Increasing or decreasing the output value using ↑ and ↓ keys
causes the actual output to change accordingly. Unlike setting registration, there is
no need to press the ENTER key.
Use the ← and → keys to move the flashing digit.
Setup data C35 is used to select smooth and preset output changes when going
from AUTO to MANUAL modes.
Changes from MANUAL to AUTO are smooth.
(Note, however, that when the integral time setting for a PID group PID parameter
of 0 may cause abrupt changes.)
● Auto-tuning (AT)
Set values can automatically be written when using auto-tuning (AT) in the RUN,
HOLD, FAST and END modes during AUTO mode operation and PID groups (1
to 9, A1 to A7 or fixed command control) are being used.
In READY AUTO mode, the tuning points of PID parameters tP-A1 to tP-A7
settings can be used as SP to perform auto-tuning of PID groups A1 to A7 values.
Variable parameter PA08 (CH1) and PA93 (CH2) allow the following selections:
0 : AT is not performed.
1 : A general AT operation of a PID group used in a mode other than
READY mode
2 : AT of PID values that do not easily overshoot can be written to a PID
group used in a mode other than READY mode.
3 : A standard AT operation is repeatedly performed on PID groups A1 to
A7 in READY mode.
4 : Repeated AT of PID values that do not easily overshoot can be written
to PID groups A1 to A7 used in READY mode.
• During auto-tuning, program run time stops. Thus the RUN and FAST modes
are changed to the HOLD mode.
• Auto-tuning always calculates the excess time and limit sensitivity of thread for
two limit cycles and calculates PID values using characteristics equations, then
automatically writes the results.
• The setup data C21 setting (CH1) and C22 setting (CH2) change the upper and
lower output limit used during auto-tuning.
A setting of 1, 3 or 5 causes the lower output limit to be determined by variable
parameter PA09 and the upper output limit to be determined by PA10.
A setting of 2 or 4, lower output limit is off and the upper output limit is on.
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
• The point at which output reverses (lower limit ⇔ upper limit) during auto-
tuning is determined from the SP and PV values at AT startup as follows.
• Auto-tuning performed using a variable parameter PA08 setting of 3 or 4 and a
PA93 setting of 3 or 4 cause auto-tuning to be performed on SP, PID
parameters tP-A1 to tP-A7, in order.
tP-A7
tP-A6
tP-A5
tP-A4
tP-A3
tP-A2
tP-A1
• Auto-tuning can be started by the AT key, external switch input and by
transmission. The AT LED flashes during auto-tuning.
• Auto-tuning terminates without writing PID constants and the AT LED goes off
when any of the following conditions occur.
• Operation is terminated by pressing of the AT key.
• Operation is terminated by an external switch input.
• Operation is terminated by transmission.
• Mode change occurs. (When the MANUAL mode is invoked; the READY
mode is invoked by setting PA08 and PA93 to 1 or 2, the RUN mode is
invoked by setting PA08 and PA93 to 3 or 4.)
• When PV goes outside the range.
Handling Precautions
• Auto-tuning cannot be performed in CH2 on a model with CP
compensation.
• Auto-tuning does not operate normally when the equipment to be
controlled is not connected.
• The time required for auto-tuning depends on the equipment controlled.
• When auto-tuning is executed, control is terminated , lower and higher
limit outputs are repeated several times and PV fluctuates. When
equipment failure may be caused by PID fluctuations, set the PID value
manually.
If just PID value can not be got in case of control object, sets PID value
with manual.
• Variable parameter PA08 and PA93 settings make values set at the start
of auto-tuning valid. A change in the PA08 and PA93 settings made
during auto-tuning execution is ignored. The new value is valid in the
next auto-tuning operation.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
7 - 1
Parameter Setup
Parameter settings can be changed when the DCP552 is in the normal display mode.
When not in the normal display mode, press the DISP key to invoke it.
■ Selecting parameter settings groups
In the normal display mode, the keys listed in the table below can be used to select
settings groups and individual items in these groups.
PA01
PA01
PA01
ConSt
PA01
PA01
Individual items in each settings group are listed below.
Variable parameter
Event configuration data
PID parameters
: PA01
: E01-t
: P-1 in READY mode
Use P setting in the used PID group in modes other
than READY mode.
Setup data
: C01
Constant value control data :ConSt when using FUNC + PID key
SP when using the PID key in constant value
control mode
■ Progression of individual items in parameter settings
The item codes for individual (specific) items are shown on display panel 1, their
set values are shown on display panel 2 and their mnemonic codes are shown on
the message panel.
Individual items are displayed in the vertical-horizontal matrix shown on page 7-3,
with matrix sizes varying according to settings group. The ↑ key, ↓ key, ← key
and → key are used to cycle through individual items.
The PARA key (valid for variable parameters and event configuration data), PID
key (valid for PID parameters and constant value control data) or the SETUP key
(valid for setup data) allow you to search for displayable items in ascending order
of item number.
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Modifying individual items and exiting the setting mode
Pressing the ENTER key while an individual item is displayed causes the set
value to flash and enables the registration state. At this point, the ↑ key and ↓
key allow you to increase or decrease the values, while the ← key and → key
move the digit positions on the display at which the values flash.
Pressing the ENTER key after the flashing number has been changed to the
desired value stops the flashing, the number reverts to the on state and the new
setting is stored in internal memory.
Modification of settings is terminated by pressing either the PARA key (valid for
variable parameters and event configuration data), PID key (valid for PID
parameters and constant value control data), SETUP key (valid for setup data) or
DISP key. Pressing the PARA key, PID key or SETUP key moves the cursor
to the next item stops the flashing and the number reverts to its normal on state.
Pressing the DISP key enables the normal display mode.
Should display panel 2 show “-----” during display of an individual item or
pressing the ENTER key not enable the registration state, it means that settings
cannot be made or modified for that item.
Handling Precautions
• When PA01 is set to more than 1 in a variable parameter setting, PA03
and items beyond are not displayed. PA03 and items beyond cannot be
changed when PA02 is set to more than 1.
• Event configuration data settings cannot be changed when PA02 is set
to a value more than 1. Also, when PA02 is set to 0 or 1, the event type
setting and some auxiliary settings (output points of code events) cannot
be changed.
• PID parameter settings cannot be changed when PA02 is set to 4 or 5.
• Setup data settings cannot be changed when PA02 is set to a value
more than 1 and cannot be displayed in modes other than the READY
mode.
• The fixed control data setting cannot be changed when PA02 is set to 4
or 5. And, since the FUNC and PID keys are invalid in modes other than
the READY mode, a ConSt setting cannot be displayed or changed.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
• Example of individual item matrix (setup data)
C100
C91
C92
C93
C01
C02
C03
C11
C12
C13
C81
C82
C83
C91
C92
C93
C01
C02
C03
C99
C09
C10
C19
C20
C89
C90
C99
C09
C10
C100
C100
C01
↑ ↓
←
→
↑ ↓
←
→
↑ ↓
←
→
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
7 - 2
Parameter Setting List
NOTE
“PVU (PV1)”, “PVU (PV2), “SPU (CH1)” and “SPU (CH2)” used in the “Factory
Default Settings” and “User Settings” columns in the lists on the following pages
have the following meaning.
PVU (PV1): When the PV1 range type (setup data setting C01) is a
thermocouple or resistance temperature detector, the PV1 decimal
point position (setup data setting C03) causes the decimal point
position to change.
When the PV range type is linear, the PV1 linear decimal point
position (setup data setting C04) causes the decimal point position to
change.
For example, in a decimal point position of 1,
–19999 PVU (PV1) becomes –19999.9 and +20000 PVU (PV1)
becomes +2000.0.
PVU (PV2): Like PVU (PV1), a PV2 range type (setup data setting C11), a PV2
decimal point position (setup data setting C13) and a PV2 linear
decimal point position (setup data setting C14) causes the decimal
point position to change.
SPU(CH1) : The SPU decimal point position (setup data setting C65) causes the
decimal point position to change.
For example a decimal point position of 2,
–19999 SPU becomes –199.99 and +20000 SPU becomes +200.00.
SPU(CH2) : The SPU decimal point position (setup data setting C68) causes the
decimal point position to change.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Variable parameter setting
PA 01
PA01
PA01
PA02
PA 02
PA02
PA01
PA02
PA 03
PA 04
PA 05
PA 06
PA 07
PA 08
PA 09
PA 10
C21
C21
PA 11
PA 12
PA 13
PA 14
PA 15
PA 16
PA 17
PA 18
PA 19
PA 20
PA 21
PA 22
PA 23
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
PA 24
PA 25
PA 26
PA 27
PA 28
PA 29
PA 30
PA 31
PA 32
PA 33
PA 34
PA 35
PA 36
PA 37
PA 38
PA 39
PA31
PA33
PA35
PA37
C62
C62
PA 40
PA 41
PA 42
PA 43
PA 44
PA 45
PA 46
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
PA 47
PA 48
PA 49
PA 50
PA 51
PA 52
PA 53
PA 54
PA 55
PA 56
PA 57
PA 58
PA 59
PA 60
PA 61
PA 62
PA 63
PA 64
PA 65
PA 66
PA 67
PA 68
PA 69
C30
PA 70
PA 71
PA 72
PA 73
PA 74
PA 75
PA 76
PA 77
PA 78
PA 79
PA 80
PA 81
PA 82
PA 83
PA 84
PA 85
PA 86
PA 87
PA 88
PA 89
PA 90
PA 91
PA 92
C30
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
PA 93
PA 94
PA 95
PA 96
C22
C22
PA 97
PA 98
PA 99
PA 100
PA 101
PA 102
PA 103
PA 104
PA 105
PA 106
PA 107
PA 108
PA 109
PA 110
PA 111
PA 112
PA 113
PA 114
PA 115
PA 116
PA 117
PA 118
PA 119
PA 120
PA97
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Detailed information on variable parameters
■ PA01 (keylock)
0: keylock disabled
1: display of setup data setting disabled
2: display of all settings disabled
3: display of all settings disabled. Operation keys disabled
• The following keys are disabled when PA01 is set to 1.
Normal display mode:
SETUP key
(setup data setting)
FUNC + CLR + MESSAGE keys (general reset)
• The following keys are disabled when PA01 is set to 2.
Normal display mode:
SETUP key
(setup data setting)
FUNC + CLR + MESSAGE keys (general reset)
FUNC + PARA keys
PID key
(event configuration data setting)
(PID parameter setting/constant value
control data setting)
FUNC + PID keys
FUNC + PROG keys
↑ + PROG keys
LOAD key
(constant value control data setting)
(program setting)
(program copy)
(memory card load)
SAVE key
(memory card save)
• The following keys are disabled when PA01 is set to 3 or to 2.
Normal display mode:
FUNC + DISP key
PROG key
(display channel switching)
(program selection)
RUN/HOLD key
PROG + RUN/HOLD keys
PROG + DISP keys
FUNC + → keys
A/M key
(RUN operation/HOLD operation)
(RESET operation)
(ADV operation)
(FAST operation)
(AUTO operation/MANUAL operation)
(AT start, AT cancel)
AT key
Note, however, that in the normal display mode in MANUAL mode MV can be
changed.
■ PA02 (memory protect)
0 : disabled
1 : program settings are protected
2 : setup, variable parameters and event configuration settings are
protected
3 : setup, variable parameters, event configuration settings and program
settings are protected
4 : setup, variable parameters, event configuration settings and PID
parameter settings are protected
5 : program settings and all parameter settings are protected
• When PA02 is set to ≠ 0 (protect on), a general reset cannot be performed.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
• When program settings are protected, it is not possible to copy programs or load
programs from a memory card.
• When PID parameters are protected, constant value control data is also
protected.
• When settings are protected by setup data, variable parameters, event
configurations and PID parameters, they cannot be loaded from a memory card.
■ PA05 (program autoload)
0 : OFF
1 : ON
• When PA05 is set to 1 and a memory card is inserted and press LOAD key,
display panel 1 shows “AUtO ”, display panel 2 shows “LOAd ” and program
file No. 1 is read to program No. 1 in the DCP552. This operation is called
“program autoload”.
• A load operation other than a program autoload that is started using the LOAD
key can only be performed when PA05 is set to 0.
• A program autoload using the external switches can be performed when PA05
is set to 0 or 1.
■ PA14 (manipulated variable deviation rate limit)
■ PA24 (manipulated variable deviation rate limit)
When output deviation (%) after a PID computation is larger than the set limit
value, the controller limits the output deviation both of the increase or decrease to
the set value.
The following example shows the actual deviation change when the deviation limit
is set to 0.5% and the manipulated variable changes from 20% to 22%. When the
set value is 0.5% per 0.1 sec, the output becomes 22% after 0.4 sec.
■ PA16 (ON-OFF control differential)
■ PA26 (ON-OFF control differential)
When the PID group number is set to ON-OFF or P is set to 0.0, ON-OFF control
is on and a value for the differential between the two operations is set.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ PA17 (PID computation initializ e manipulated variable)
■ PA27 (PID computation initializ e manipulated variable)
Under the conditions listed below, a PID computation starts using the value set in
PA17.
• When there is a mode change from READY AUTO to RUN AUTO.
• When the controller is powered up in RUN (or HOLD, FAST, END) AUTO
mode.
• When auto-tuning ends.
Since the PV, SP and PID parameters affect a PID computation, the first
manipulated variable of a PID computation may not be the same as the value set in
PA17 and PA27.
■ PA31 to PA38 (event on delay groups 1 to 4, event/delay time)
• On delay can be performed on up to 4 events.
• PA31, PA33, PA35 and PA37 determine which events are to be processed.
• In a code event involving several event outputs, event on delay has to be set
separately for each output.
• All processes including event output standby on/off are processed before on
delay processing. When the event output ON condition remains on for longer
than the on delay time, the event output stays on.
• This is shown in the diagram below.
■ PA43 (PID computation initializ e)
■ PA96 (PID computation initializ e)
When SP changes abruptly due to ADV, the derivative action of a PID
computation, may cause an excessive change in the manipulated variable of the
computation.
For this reason, the initialization of a PID computation is performed to suppress an
excessive change.
But the initialization of a PID computation means that PID computation continuity
is lost which may affect operating conditions. PA43 and PA96 settings allow the
user to turn on or off initialization and determine its conditions.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Event configuration data settings
E01-t
E01-1
E01-2
E02-t
■
E02-1
E02-2
E03-t
E03-1
E03-2
E04-t
E04-1
E04-2
E05-t
E05-1
E05-2
E06-t
E06-2
E06-3
E07-t
E07-1
E07-2
E08-t
E08-1
E08-2
E09-t
E09-1
E09-2
E10-t
E10-1
E10-2
E11-t
E11-1
E11-2
E12-t
E12-1
E12-2
E13-t
E13-1
E13-2
E14-t
E14-1
E14-2
E15-t
E15-1
E15-2
E16-t
E16-1
E16-2
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Settings by event type
For information on event operations, see “■ Events” (pages 5-5 to 5-14).
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
*1:
Code event auxiliary setting 1 (number of output points) can be changed only in the READY mode.
*2:
Auxiliary setting 1 (number of output points) can be changed only in the READY mode.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
*1:
The meaning of auxiliary setting 1 for special segment is shown below.
–2: Two segments before the final segment
–1: One segment before the final segment
0: Final segment
1: First segment
2: Second segment
*2:
*3:
When auxiliary setting 1 of RAMP-E time monitoring is set to 0.0 sec, event output is off.
Auxiliary setting 1 and auxiliary setting 2 of segment time and program time that determine display
unit and range of segment are set by setup data C62 settings as follows.
When C62 is set to 0: 0 hours 00 min to 500 hours 00 min
When C62 is set to 1: 0 min 00 sec to 500 min 00 sec
When C62 is set to 2: 0.0 sec to 3000.0 sec
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ PID parameter (CH1) setting
P
l
P-1
I-1
d
d-1
rE
rE -1
oL-1
oH-1
P-2
oL
oH
CP
tP
I-2
d-2
P
l d
rE
rE
rE-2
oL-2
oH-2
P-3
I-3
P
l
d
d
d-3
rE
rE-3
oL-3
oL
oL oH
oH
CP
oH-3
P-4
I-4
tP
P I
D
d-4
rE-4
oL-4
oH-4
P-5
I-5
d-5
rE-5
oL-5
oH-5
P-6
I-6
d-6
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
rE-6
oL-6
oH-6
P-7
I-7
d-7
rE-7
oL-7
oH-7
P-8
I-8
d-8
rE-8
oL-8
oH-8
P-9
I-9
d-9
rE-9
oL-9
oH-9
P-A1
I-A1
d-A1
rE-A1
CP-A1
tP-A1
P-A2
I-A2
d-A2
rE-A2
CP-A2
tP-A2
P-A3
I-A3
d-A3
rE-A3
CP-A3
tP-A3
P-A4
I-A4
d-A4
rE-A4
CP-A4
tP-A4
P-A5
I-A5
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
d-A5
rE-A5
CP-A5
tP-A5
P-A6
I-A6
d-A6
rE-A6
CP-A6
tP-A6
P-A7
I-A7
d-A7
rE-A7
CP-A7
tP-A7
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ PID parameter (CH2) setting
P
l
P-1
I-1
d
d-1
rE
rE -1
oL-1
oH-1
P-2
oL
oH
CP
tP
I-2
d-2
P
l d
rE
rE
rE-2
oL-2
oH-2
P-3
I-3
P
l
d
d
d-3
rE
rE-3
oL-3
oL
oL oH
oH
CP
oH-3
P-4
I-4
tP
P I
D
d-4
rE-4
oL-4
oH-4
P-5
I-5
d-5
rE-5
oL-5
oH-5
P-6
I-6
d-6
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
rE-6
oL-6
oH-6
P-7
I-7
d-7
rE-7
oL-7
oH-7
P-8
I-8
d-8
rE-8
oL-8
oH-8
P-9
I-9
d-9
rE-9
oL-9
oH-9
P-A1
I-A1
d-A1
rE-A1
CP-A1
tP-A1
P-A2
I-A2
d-A2
rE-A2
CP-A2
tP-A2
P-A3
I-A3
d-A3
rE-A3
CP-A3
tP-A3
P-A4
I-A4
d-A4
rE-A4
CP-A4
tP-A4
P-A5
I-A5
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
d-A5
rE-A5
CP-A5
tP-A5
P-A6
I-A6
d-A6
rE-A6
CP-A6
tP-A6
P-A7
I-A7
d-A7
rE-A7
CP-A7
tP-A7
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Setup data setting
C 01
C 02
C 03
C01
C01
C01
C02
C01
C02
C01
C02
C01
C01
C02
C02
C01
C02
C01
C 04
C01
C01
C01
C 05
C 06
C 07
C 08
C01
C01
C01
C01
C 09
C 10
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
C 11
C 12
C 13
C01
C11
C11
C12
C11
C12
C11
C12
C11
C12
C11
C12
C11
C12
C11
C 14
C11
C11
C 15
C11
C 16
C 17
C11
C 18
C11
C11
C 19
C 20
C11
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
C 21
C 22
C 23
C 24
C 25
C 26
C 27
C 28
C 29
C 30
C 31
C 32
C 33
C
C
C
C
C
7-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
C 39
C 40
C 41
C 42
C 43
C 44
C 45
C45
C45
C 46
C 47
C 48
C48
C48
C 49
C 50
C 51
C 52
C 53
C 54
C 55
C 56
7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
C 57
C 58
C 59
C 60
C 61
C 62
C 63
C 64
C 65
C 66
C 67
C01 C06
C66
C67
C 68
C 69
C 70
C11 C16
C69
C70
C69
C70
C 71
C 72
C 73
C 74
C 75
7-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
C 76
C 77
C97
C76
C97
C97
C 78
C 79
C97
C97
C 80
C 81
C 82
C 83
C 84
C 85
C 86
C 87
C 88
C 89
C 90
I
C 91
C 92
C 93
C 94
C 95
C 96
C 97
C76 C80
C 98
7-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
Factory default
settings
User
settings
No.
Settings and descriptions
Item
Item code
PV1 zener barrier adjustment
-20.00 to +20.00
[Description:]
99 C 99
----
“----” is displayed when PV1 is not an RTD input and C98
is not equal 241.
PV2 zener barrier adjustment
-20.00 to +20.00
[Description:]
100 C100
----
“----” is displayed when PV2 is not an RTD input and C98
is not equal 241.
7-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Detailed descriptions of setup data settings
■ C07 (PV1 cold junction compensation)
■ C17 (PV2 cold junction compensation)
• This is a selection for cold junction compensation for thermocouples.
• When set to 1, perform 0°C compensation using a cold junction compensation
device outside the DCP552.
■ C08 (PV1 square root extraction)
■ C09 (PV1 square root extraction dropout)
■ C18 (PV2 square root extraction)
■ C19 (PV2 square root extraction dropout)
• Flow pressure detected by the orifice of a normal differential pressure type
flowmeter is proportional to the power 2 of the flow rate signal. Consequently,
square root extraction is used when a uniform signal is needed.
When the input in the square root extraction is C09 or less than the dropout set
in C19, an output of 0% can be obtained in the square root process.
• Square root extraction is not performed when C08 and C18 are set to 0.
×
■ C46 (auxiliary output 1 lower limit)
■ C47 (auxiliary output 1 upper limit)
■ C49 (auxiliary output 2 lower limit)
■ C50 (auxiliary output 2 upper limit)
• This is the scaling setting of the auxiliary output. The high and low values for
the upper and lower limits can be reversed.
• The example below shows that the output from auxiliary output 1 is 12mA
when MV is 100% and 20mA when MV is 0%. As shown, a 200% MV value is
required to generate an output of 4mA.
Thus C46 is set to 200.0 and C47 is set to 0.0.
7-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ C63 (time display)
0: remaining segment time
1: total operation time
• These are selections for display panel 1 and 2 in the normal display mode in the
program run mode.
• In the READY mode a setting of 0 displays the set time values for the selected
segments.
• In the RUN, HOLD, FAST and END modes a setting of 0 displays the
remaining time in rounded hours.
For example, when the time unit hours/min is selected a remaining time of 1
hour 30 minutes and 59 seconds is displayed as “1.30 ”.
• In the READY mode a setting of 1 displays the time as “0.00 ”.
• In the RUN, HOLD, FAST and END modes a setting of 1 means that the time
is displayed in rounded hours after a change from the READY mode to the
RUN mode. In G.SOAK wait, repeat, cycle and pattern link, time is displayed
as integrated values.
When the time unit is hours/min or min/sec, the display returns to “0.00 ” after
“499.59 ”. When the time unit is 0.1 sec, the display returns to “0.0 ” after
“2999.9 ”.
When the time unit is hour/min, a total operating time of 501 hours 30 minutes
and 59 seconds is displayed as “1.30 ”.
• In FAST mode a setting of 0 or 1 displays the time according to FAST X.
■ C66 (SP limit lower limit)
■ C67 (SP limit upper limit)
■ C69 (SP limit lower limit)
■ C70 (SP limit upper limit)
• These settings operate as limiters when SP is set or changed in the program
setting pattern items.
• In the program run mode these settings operate as limiters when SP and SP bias
(variable parameter) set in a program are added to produce the resulting SP.
• These settings operate as limiters when SP is set or changed in constant value
control data settings.
• In the constant value control mode these settings operate as limiters when SP
and SP bias (variable parameter) set in constant value control data settings are
added to produce the resulting SP.
7-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ C93 (time proportional output system)
■ C94 (time proportional output system)
0: Goes on again within time proportional cycle
1: Does not go on again within time proportional cycle
• This setting determines whether the output is to go on again after the result of a
PID computation has changed in a time proportional cycle (cycle time) and the
output has been turned off.
• The difference between the two settings is illustrated below.
→
→
→
→
■ C95 (voltage output control)
■ C96 (voltage output control)
In a voltage time proportional output driven by SSR, the DCP552 must enter the
SSR rated input voltage (optimum striking voltage of arc).
The DCP552 employs a newly developed variable output system that can output
optimum striking voltage of arc to accommodate multiple SSR drives. A suitable
current value is set on the DCP552 to obtain optimum striking voltage of arc for
the internal impedance of the SSR. An equivalent circuit with related equations is
shown below.
• Description of symbols
(1) Settings
I0
: set DCP552 output current (range: 2 to 22mA)
: end-to-end load voltage (13.2V)
V0
VSSR'
VSSR
: actual voltage input to SSR
: rated input voltage range for SSR (VSSR/MIN to VSSR/MAX)
VSSR/MIN : minimum SSR rated input voltage
VSSR/MAX : maximum SSR rated input voltage
Z
: internal SSR impedance
: internal SSR voltage drop (normally about 1 to 2V)
VD
(2) Equivalent circuit showing connection of one SSR
SSR
DCP552
Z
I0
VSSR'
(V0 )
VD
Equations (1) and (2) below must be satisfied.
VSSR/MIN ≤ I0 × Z + VD ≤V0
VSSR' ≤ VSSR/MAX
Equation (1)
Equation (2)
(VSSR' = I0 × Z + VD)
7-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
(3) Equivalent circuit showing connection of n SSRs
DCP552
SSR 1
Z
I0
(V0 )
VSSR'
VD
SSR n
Z
VSSR'
VD
Equations (3) and (4) below must be satisfied.
VSSR/MIN ≤ I0 × Z+VD ≤V0 /N
VSSR' ≤ VSSR/MAX
Equation (3)
Equation (4)
(VSSR' = I0× Z + VD)
(4) Equivalent circuit showing parallel connection of n SSRs
DCP552
SSR 1
SSR n
Z
Z
I0 /N
I0 /N
I0
(V )
SSR'
V
VSSR'
0
VD
VD
Equations (5) and (6) below must be satisfied.
VSSR/MIN ≤ I0 /N × Z+VD ≤V0
VSSR' ≤ VSSR/MAX
Equation (5)
Equation (6)
(VSSR' = I0 /N × Z + VD)
7-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ C99 (PV1 z ener barrier adjustment)
■ C100 (PV2 z ener barrier adjustment)
The adjustment described below must be performed when a zener barrier is
used.
(1) Turn off the DCP552. When installation and wiring is completed, short-
circuit A and B on the resistance temperature detector.
(2) Turn on the DCP552 and set setup data C98 to 241.
(3) Display setup data C99 and C100.
(4) Press the ENTER key to display the difference in resistance (A-B) between
zener barriers connected to wire A and wire B.
(5) Press the ENTER key to store the difference in resistance values (A-B) in
the DCP552.
(6) Press the DISP key to return to the normal display mode.
(7) urn off the DCP552 and disconnect the wire between A and B.
Handing Precautions
• Adjust the resistance in the zener barriers connected to wire A and B to
20Ω or less. Adjustment is not possible if the resistance is higher than
20Ω.
• This adjustment is not required for inputs other than resistance
temperature detectors or when zener barriers are not to be used.
• When a zener barrier has been adjusted, compensation is performed for
this zener barrier. When resistance temperature detector inputs not
employing zener barriers are to be used, perform the above adjustment
without the zener barriers.
7-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Constant value control data (CH1) setting
ConSt
C66 C67
SP
P
I
P
d
rE
P
P
I
oL
oH
■ Constant value control data (CH2) setting
ConSt
C69 C70
SP
P
I
P
d
rE
P
P
I
oL
oH
7-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
8 - 1
Program Setup
Programming is enabled in the normal display mode. When the DCP552 is not in the normal mode display, press
the DISP key to invoke it. Programming is simpler if you set down the objectives of the program on a program
work sheet before you start programming.
NOTE
For ease of use, please enlarge the copy of the DCP551/552 Program Work
Sheet located after page 12-18.
■ Selecting number of program to operate
Numbers can be selected in one of two ways.
• before programming
• during programming
■ Selecting program number before programming
Press the PROG key in the normal display mode in the READY mode. When the
program number starts flashing, use the PROG key or the ↑, ↓, ←, or → key to
select a number.
Handling Precautions
Program numbers cannot be selected during external switch input.
See “ Section 6-3 Selecting Programs” (page 6-11) for details.
■ Selecting program number during programming
Press the FUNC and PROG keys in program setting state so that the program
number starts to flash. Use the ↑, ↓, ←, or → key to make the desired changes
and press the ENTER key to enter them. Note, however, that you must after
exiting the registration state (when set values flash) with the ENTER key, press
the FUNC and PROG keys. When programs are selected in this way, the pattern
items are displayed on the programming map.
This allows you to select a program number of a program other than the one
processed in the RUN mode. It also allows you to select the number of another
program using the external switches.
■ Selecting channel of program to operate
Channels can be selected in one of two ways.
• before programming
• during programming
■ Selecting channel before programming
Press the FUNC and DISP keys in the normal display mode to change channels.
■ Selecting channel during programming
Press the FUNC and DISP keys in the program setting mode, to change
channels. The system is set to the program setting mode for a different channel
with the same program number and the pattern item in the first segment is
displayed.
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Starting programming
■ Key operations
Start programming by pressing the FUNC and PROG keys in the normal display
mode.
In the program setting state, PRG LED on the console lights and the decimal
points in the program number display and the segment number display lights.
Note, however, that the program setting state cannot be entered in the following
cases.
• In the fixed command control mode (and the fixed command control data
ConSt is set to 1)
• When keylock is engaged (and variable parameters PA01 is set to 2 or 3)
In the following condition changes cannot be made in the program setting state.
• When a program is protected (and variable parameter PA02 is set to 1, 3 or 5)
■ Start of display items
When programming is started, the number of the started program and its segment
are displayed.
■ State transition
The figure below shows the transition of states during programming.
The numbered items (1) to (20) are described on the following page.
InS
dEL
CLEAr
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Description of numbered items in the figure illustrating the program setting state
(1) Programming is started. Up to about 1 second after the programming state is
entered, the remaining number of segments is displayed in display panel 1 and
the remaining number of subfunctions is displayed in display panel number 2.
The display can be held by pressing the FUNC key.
(2) Move the setting items on the programming map.
(3) Move the segments on the programming map.
(4) Register the first setting.
(5) Increase or decrease the values in the first setting and move the flashing digits.
(6) Complete the registration of the first setting.
Pressing the ENTER key registers the set value in memory.
For items with a second setting, the registration state for the second item is
displayed. The display reverts to display set values for items without a second
setting. Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys returns a segment to its initial
state.
(7) Use the FUNC and ENTER keys in pattern items to go between RAMP-X
⇔ RAMP-T and RAMP-X ⇔ RAMP-E. The setting in setup data C61
determines the changeover that is actually performed.
Note, however, that a changeover cannot be made when a segment is running.
(8) Use the FUNC and CLR keys in pattern items to display “CLEAr ” to delete
the program beyond that segment.
Note, however, that the FUNC and CLR keys are invalid when a program is
running.
(9) When the ENTER keys is used, the program beyond the point where the key
was pressed is deleted. Pressing the DISP key does not delete any data but
causes the display to show set values.
(10)Increase or decrease the values in the second setting and move the flashing
digits.
(11)Complete the registration of the second setting.
Pressing the ENTER keys registers the set value in memory.
Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys returns a segment to its initial state.
(12)Complete the registration without entering the value in memory.
(13)Pressing the FUNC and ENTER keys in pattern items displays the segment
insertion and deletion panel “InS.” flashes.
Note, however, that the FUNC and ENTER keys are invalid when a program
is running.
(14)Use the ↓ key to delete and the ↑ key to insert the flashing item.
(15)Pressing the ENTER keys when “InS.” is displayed inserts the segment.
Pressing the ENTER keys when “dEL.” is displayed deletes the segment.
Pressing the DISP key neither deletes or inserts the segment.
(16)Press the FUNC and PROG keys so that the program number starts to flash.
(17)Program numbers and segment numbers can be increased or decreased and the
moving digits can be moved.
(18)Pressing the ENTER keys completes the registration of program and
segment numbers.
(19)The normal display mode appears.
(20)Change chanells.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Programming map
As shown below, a programming map consists of columns of segment numbers
and rows of program setting items.
In the program setting state, the items in the solid lines indicated by the segment
numbers and program setting items are displayed.
← key, → key : moves segments right and left
↑ key, ↓ key : moves segments up and down
The figure shows a programming map from the first to the 10th segment.
Programming map example:
*1 : Items up to segment 10 has been entered.
*2 : The event types of each event are listed below.
Event 1/2
Event 3/4
Event 5
: PV upper limit (event type setting 2)
: time event (event type setting 1)
: code event using two points
(event type setting 18, auxiliary setting 2)
: time code event using two points
(event type setting 23, auxiliary setting 2)
Event 7
Event 9 to 16: assigned to CH2 events (when setup C64 is set to 9)
*3 : These are settings used in each program and are shared by all segments.
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Display items
Items displayed are shown in the figure below.
■ Setting pattern items
(1) In the set value display state, move to the segment pattern item to be set on the
programming map.
(2) Press the ENTER key to make display panel 1 flash (registration of first
setting).
(3) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to set the first setting (SP).
Setting range: SP limit lower limit to upper limit
(SP limit is set using setup data C66, C67, C69 and C70.)
(4) Pressing the ENTER key stops display panel 1 from flashing and causes
display panel 2 to start flashing. (This starts start registration of the second
setting.) Instead of pressing the ENTER key, press the FUNC and ENTER
keys to switch between RAMP types (selecting RAMP-X ⇔ RAMP-T, or
RAMP-X ⇔ RAMP-E is made with setup data C61).
(5) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the second setting (time).
Setting range: 0:00 to 500:00, 0.0 to 3000.0
(Time units are selected using setup data C62 to set Hour/min, Min/sec, 0.1
sec. Since a colon “: ” cannot be displayed, the decimal point is used instead.)
(6) Press the ENTER key to stop display panel 2 from flashing.
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Display
Segments that have not been set and unset values for SP and time are indicated by
“-----”.
NOTE
Event settings are displayed in the two rows of the message panel. Events 1 to 8
are displayed in the top left row and events 9 to 16 are displayed in the lower left
row. The meaning of the codes used are listed below.
– : event off
T : time event
P : PV/PV deviation rate event
D : Deviation/absolute deviation
M : MV event
S : SP event
C : code/time code event
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting event items
Handling Precautions
Events assigned to the selected channel can be displayed.
Note that when setup data C57 is set to 1, event items on the programming
map are skipped and not displayed.
■ When the event is a PV event
(1) In the set value display state, move to the segement event item to be set on the
programming map.
(2) Press the ENTER key to make display panel 1 flash (registration of first
setting).
(3) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the first setting – setting the event
operating point.
Setting range : OFF –19999 to +20000 SPU
: OFF 0 to 20000 SPU (for absolute value deviation events)
: OFF –5.0 to +105.0% (for MV events)
(4) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 1. (Pressing the
FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 1 to return to unset state “-----”
and the flashing stops.)
■ Display (PV events)
Unset values are indicated as “ ----- ”.
NOTE
A PV event setting consists of a setting (including OFF) and a subfunction. A
subfunction cannot be used when a setting has not been made “ ----- ”.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ When the event is a time event
(1) In the set value display state, move to the event item to be set for the segment
on the programming map.
(2) Press the ENTER key to make display panel 1 flash (registration of first
setting).
(3) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the first setting (On Time setting).
Setting range: 0:00 to 500:00, 0.0 to 3000.0
(Time units are selected using setup data C62 to set Hour/min, Min/sec, 0.1
sec. Since a colon “: ” cannot be displayed, the decimal point is used instead.)
(4) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 1 and display
panel 2 starts flashing. (Start of second setting)
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 1 and 2 to return to
unset state “-----” and the flashing stops.)
(5) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the second setting (Off Time setting).
Setting range: On time setting +0:01 to 500:00, Off time setting +0.1 to
3000.0
(6) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 2.
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 2 to return to unset
state “-----” and the flashing stops.)
■ Display (time event)
• Unset values are indicated as “-----”.
• When the On Time is set to 500:00 or 3000.0, an Off Time cannot be set.
NOTE
A time event setting consists of one setting, an On Time, or two settings, an On
Time and an Off Time. When both settings are made a subfunction can be used. In
unset state “-----” a subfunction cannot be used.
Handling Precautions
In a time event, an On Time or Off Time setting that is the same as or
exceeds the segment time is invalid.
Note, however, that when there is a G.SOAK wait at the end of a segment
or an END mode at the end of a program, an On Time or Off Time setting
that is the same as the segment time is valid.
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ When the event is a code event
(1) In the set value display state, move to the event item to be set for the segment
on the programming map.
(2) Press the ENTER key to make display panel 1 flash (registration of first
setting).
(3) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the first setting – setting the event
output code.
Setting range :0 to 2n – 1
(n indicates the number of output points set in event
configuration 1 auxiliary setting 1.)
(4) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 1.
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 1 to return to unset
state “-----” and the flashing stops.)
■ Display (code event)
Unset values are indicated as “-----”.
NOTE
Code events use one subfunction. A subfunction cannot be used when a setting has
not been made “-----”.
Events that follow the event number of a code event (number of output points less
1) are skipped and not displayed.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ When the event is a timer code event
(1) In the set value display state, move to the event item to be set for the segment
on the programming map.
(2) Press the ENTER key to make display panel 1 flash (registration of first
setting).
(3) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the first setting (output code).
Setting range:0 to 2n – 1
(n indicates the number of output points set in event
configuration 1 auxiliary setting 1.)
(4) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 1 and display
panel 2 starts flashing. (Start of second setting)
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 1 and 2 to return to
unset state “-----” and the flashing stops.)
(5) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the second setting (time).
Setting range: 0:00 to 500:00, 0.0 to 3000.0
(Time units are selected using setup data C64 to set Hour/min, Min/sec, 0.1
sec. Since a colon “: ” cannot be displayed, the decimal point is used instead.)
(6) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 2.
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 1 and 2 to return to
unset state “-----” and the flashing stops.)
■ Display (Code event with a timer function)
Unset values are indicated as “-----”.
NOTE
Timer code events use one subfunction. A subfunction cannot be used when a
setting has not been made “-----”.
Events that follow the event number of a timer code event (number of output
points less 1) are skipped and not displayed.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
Handling Precautions
In a timer code event, an On Time or Off Time setting that is the same as
or exceeds the segment time is invalid.
Note, however, that when there is a G.SOAK wait at the end of a segment
or an END mode at the end of a program, an On Time or Off Time setting
that is the same as the segment time is valid.
■ When the event is an event off
Such event items on the programming map are skipped and not displayed.
■ When the event is an instrument event
Such event items on the programming map are skipped and not displayed.
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting PID groups and output limiter group number items
(1) In the set value display state, move to the PID group, output limiter group
number item to be set for the segment on the programming map.
(2) Press the ENTER key to make display panel 1 flash (registration of first
setting).
(3) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the first setting (PID group number).
Setting range: ON-OFF, PID 0 to 9, PID A
(4) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 1 and display
panel 2 starts flashing. (Start of second setting)
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 1 and 2 to return to
unset state “Pld 0/otL 0 ” and the flashing stops.)
(5) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the second setting (output limiter
group number).
Setting range: 0 to 9
(6) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 2.
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 2 to return to unset
state “Pld 0/otL 0 ” and the flashing stops.)
■ Display
• Unset values are indicated as “Pld 0/otL 0 ”.
• When setup data C58 is set to 1, PID groups, output limiter group number
items are skipped and not displayed.
NOTE
When a PID group or output limiter group number is not 0 or both are something
other than 0, they use a subfunction. A subfunction cannot be used when a setting
has not been made “Pld 0/otL 0 ”.
Handling Precautions
• When a set value for a PID group number is 0, it is a sequel to a PID
number in a previous segment. When the set value for a PID group
number in the first segment is 0, the set value is 1.
• When a set value for an output limiter group number is 0, it is a sequel
to an output limiter group number in a previous segment. When the set
value for an output limiter group number in the first segment is 0, the set
value is 1.
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting G.SOAK (Guarantee soak) items
(1) In the set value display state, move to the G.SOAK item to be set for the
segment on the programming map.
(2) Press the ENTER key to make display panel 1 flash (registration of first
setting).
(3) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the first setting – setting the G.SOAK
type.
Setting range:0 to 3
0: No G.SOAK
1: First G.SOAK segment
2: Last G.SOAK segment
3: Entire G.SOAK segment
(4) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 1 and display
panel 2 starts flashing. (Start of second setting)
Note, however, that when the first setting is 0, “-----” is shown in the second
panel which does not flash.
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 1 and 2 to return to
unset state “g.S.0/-----” and the flashing stops.)
(5) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the second setting (G.SOAK width).
Setting range: 0 to 1000 SPU
(6) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 2.
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 1 and 2 to return to
unset state “g.S.0/-----” and the flashing stops.)
■ Display
• Unset values are indicated as “g.S.0/-----”.
• When setup data C59 is set to 1, a G.SOAK item on the programming map is
skipped and not displayed.
NOTE
When a G.SOAK setting is something other than 0, it uses a subfunction.
A subfunction cannot be used when a setting has not been made “g.S.0/-----”.
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting PV shift items
(1) In the set value display state, move to the PV shift item to be set for the
segment on the programming map.
(2) Press the ENTER key to make display panel 2 flash (registration of first
setting).
(3) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the first setting – setting the PV shift
set value.
Setting range: –10000 to +10000 SPU
(4) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 2.
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 1 to return to unset
state “-----” and the flashing stops.)
■ Display
• Unset values are indicated as “-----”.
• When setup data C59 is set to 1, a PV shift item on the programming map is
skipped and not displayed.
NOTE
PV shift uses a subfunction. A subfunction cannot be used when a setting has not
been made “-----”.
Handling Precautions
When PV shift is not set, it is a sequel to a PV shift value in a previous
segment. When PV shift is not set in the first segment, the set value is 0.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting repeat items
(1) In the set value display state, move to the repeat item to be set for the segment
on the programming map.
(2) Press the ENTER key to make display panel 1 flash (registration of first
setting).
(3) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the first setting – setting the number of
the return segment.
Setting range: 0 to segment number in setting
(4) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 1 and display
panel 2 starts flashing. (Start of second setting)
Note, however, that when the first setting is 0, “-----” is shown in the second
panel which does not flash.
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 1 and 2 to return to
unset state “rP.0/-----” and the flashing stops.)
(5) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the second setting (repeat segment
times).
Setting range: 1 to 10000
(6) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 2.
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 1 and 2 to return to
unset state “rP.0/-----” and the flashing stops.)
■ Display
• Unset values are indicated as “rP.0/-----”.
• When setup data C59 is set to 1, a repeat item on the programming map is
skipped and not displayed.
NOTE
When the number of return segment is something other than 0, it uses a
subfunction.
A subfunction cannot be used when a setting has not been made “rP.0/-----”.
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting PV start items
(1) In the set value display state, move to the PV start item to be set for the
segment on the programming map.
(A PV start item is a program setting and is the same for each segment.)
(2) Press the ENTER key to make display panel 2 flash (registration of first
setting).
(3) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the first setting – setting the PV start
value.
Setting range:0 to 3
0: no PV start
1: descending PV start
2: ascending PV start
3: bi-directional PV start
(4) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 2.
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 2 to return to unset
state “0 ” and the flashing stops.)
■ Display
• A PV start item is a program setting and is the same for each segment.
• When setup data C60 is set to 1, a PV start item on the programming map is
skipped and not displayed.
NOTE
A PV start item setting does not use subfunctions.
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting cycle items
(1) In the set value display state, move to the cycle item to be set for the segment
on the programming map.
(A cycle item is a program setting and is the same for each segment.)
(2) Press the ENTER key to make display panel 2 flash (registration of first
setting).
(3) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the first setting – setting the cycle
value.
Setting range: 0 to 10000
(4) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 2.
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 2 to return to unset
state “0 ” and the flashing stops.)
■ Display
• A cycle item is a program setting and is the same for each segment.
• When setup data C60 is set to 1, a cycle item on the programming map is
skipped and not displayed.
NOTE
A cycle item setting does not use subfunctions.
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting pattern link items
(1) In the set value display state, move to the pattern link item to be set for the
segment on the programming map.
(A pattern link item is a program setting and is the same for each segment.)
(2) Press the ENTER key to make display panel 2 flash (registration of first
setting).
(3) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the first setting – setting the pattern
link value.
Setting range:0 to 49
0
: no pattern link
1 to 49: program number at pattern link destination
(4) Press the ENTER key to stop the flashing on display panel 2.
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes display panel 2 to return to unset
state “0 ”and the flashing stops.)
■ Display
• A pattern link item is a program setting and is the same for each segment.
• When setup data C60 is set to 1, a pattern link item on the programming map is
skipped and not displayed.
NOTE
A pattern link item setting does not use subfunctions.
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting tag items
(1) In the set value display state, move to the tag item to be set for the segment on
the programming map.
(A tag item is a program setting and is the same for each segment.)
(2) Press the ENTER key to display the cursor “__” below the leftmost of the 8
characters in the message panel “[ ]” field (registration of first setting).
(3) Use the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys to make the first setting – selecting the 8
characters for the tag. The table below shows the 128 characters that can be
used.
(4) Press the ENTER key and the cursor in the message panel disappears.
(Pressing the FUNC and CLR keys causes the message panel return to
displaying an 8-character tag consisting of “PROG ”, a two-digit program
number and two space characters. The cursor is turned off.)
■ Display
↓key
↑key
NOTE
A tag item setting does not use subfunctions.
The tag of CH1 program and CH2 program with same program number is
common.
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Deleting programs
(1) In the set value display state, move to the start of the segment pattern item to
be deleted on the programming map.
Move to the first segment of the program to delete the entire program.
(2) Press the ENTER key to make display panel 1 flash (registration of first
setting). (This the same as for pattern item settings.)
(3) Press the FUNC and CLR keys and you are prompted to confirm program
deletion. “CLEAr ” flashes in display panel 1.
(4) Press the ENTER key to delete the program.
(5) The set value display state appears and “-----” is shown in both display panel
1 and 2.
■ Display
• Segments that have not been set and unset values for SP and time are indicated
by “-----”.
• A program that is running (in RUN, HOLD, FAST, END or READY FAST
mode) cannot be deleted.
8-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Inserting and deleting segments
(1) In the set value display state, move to insert segment or delete segment
segment pattern item on the programming map.
(2) Press the FUNC and ENTER keys and you are prompted to confirm segment
insertion. “InS.” flashes in display panel 1.
(3) Press the ↑ key and you are prompted to confirm segment insertion. “InS.”
flashes in display panel 1. Press the ↓ key and you are prompted to confirm
segment deletion. “dEL.” flashes in display panel 1.
(4) Pressing the ENTER key when “InS.” is displayed in display panel 1 inserts
the segment. Pressing the ENTER key when “dEL.” is displayed in display
panel 1 deletes the segment.
(5) The set value display state appears.
■ Display (segment insertion)
■ Display (segment deletion)
• When a segment is inserted, a new segment is automatically created and the
numbers of subsequent segments are incremented by one.
8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
The set value of the inserted segment is as follows:
Set SP value : same value as the original segment before insertion
Set time value : 0:10, 1.0
Event items, PID groups, output limiter group number items, G.SOAK items, PV
shift items and repeat items are not set.
• When the 99th segment has already been set, the segment insertion indication
“InS.” is not displayed.
• When 2000 segments have already been set, pressing the ENTER key to
execute an insertion cannot be used to insert a segment.
• When segments are deleted, the following segments are moved up and the
numbers of subsequent segments are decremented by one. When the final
segment is deleted, the displayed segment becomes an unset segment.
• A program that is running (in RUN, HOLD, FAST, END or READY FAST
mode) cannot be deleted.
8-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
8 - 2
Copying Programs
The DCP552 allows you to copy programs when it is in the READY program run mode. If not in this mode, press
the DISP key to invoke the normal display mode.
■ Program copy procedures
(1) Invoke the program run READY program run mode.
Set variable parameter PA01 to 0 or 1 and set variable parameter PA02 to 0.
(2) Press the PROG key and the ↑, ↓, ←, and → key keys in the normal
display mode to select the number of the program to be copied.
This is not possible when the program number is selected using external
switch inputs.
See “ Section 6-3 Selecting Programs” (page 6-11f)or details.
(3) Press the ↑ key and the PROG key to display “COPY ” in display panel 1.
The number of the program to be copied starts to flash in display panel 2.
(4) Press the ↑, and ↓ keys and currently unset program numbers that can be
used as numbers for the program to be copied start to flash.
When there are no unset numbers, “-----” is displayed in display panel 2.
(5) Press the ENTER key to start program copy and display panel 2 stops
flashing. Programs in CH1 and CH2 are copied simultaneously. Repeat steps r
and t to copy more programs.
Repeat steps (4) and (5) to copy more programs.
(6) When a program has been copied, press the DISP key.
■ Display
8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
8 - 3
General Reset
A general reset can be performed when the controller is in the READY AUTO mode in the normal display mode. If
not in the normal display mode, press the DISP key to invoke it. A general reset has the following functions.
Program settings such as program numbers 1 to 49 are all deleted. Parameters are reset to their factory defaults and
the READY AUTO program run mode is invoked.
■ General reset procedures
(1) Invoke the READY AUTO mode for both CH1 and CH2. Or set variable
parameters PA01 and PA02 to 0.
(2) Press the FUNC, CLR and MESSAGE keys and you are prompted to
confirm a general reset. “g.rESt ” is displayed in display panel 1.
(3) Press the ENTER key to execute the general reset and start startup operations
that occur after a power up.
Press the DISP key cancels the general reset and returns the normal display
mode.
■ Display
→
→
In the fixed command control mode, program number, segment number and
profile display go off.
• When the RAM backup fails at startup, the controller automatically prompts
you to confirm a general reset – no key input is required - and “g.rESt ” flashes
in display panel 1.
Press the ENTER key to execute the general reset. All other keys are invalid.
• A general reset does not return the following settings to factory default values.
C01, C02, C11, C12, C21 C22: these values are stored.
Note, however, that a general reset resulting from a RAM failure at startup
resets also these settings to factory default values.
8-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS
9 - 1
Memory Card Type and Functions
A memory card can be used to store the setup data, variable parameters, PID parameters (including constant value
control data), event configuration data and multiple programs required by one DCP552.
● Memory card types
The following memory cards can be used by the DCP552.
Model No.
Memory type
Battery
Capacity (Byte)
No. of programs
SKM008A
SKM016A
SKM064A
SKM256C
SKM008E
SKM032E
RAM
RAM
RAM
RAM
Not replaceable
Not replaceable
Not replaceable
Replaceable
Not necessity
Not necessity
7.00K
Max. 10
Max. 26
Max. 49
Max. 49
Max. 10
Max. 49
14.50K
61.75K
251.00K
7.00K
2
E PROM
2
E PROM
29.75K
● Memory card functions
• Save:(write)
Saves selected DCP552 data on the memory card.
• Load: (read)
Loads selected memory card data onto the DCP552.
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS
9 - 2 Save Procedures
Insert a memory card when the DCP552 is in the READY mode and the normal display mode. Press the SAVE
key to start a save operation. “CArd ” is displayed in display panel 1 and “SAVE ” is displayed in display panel 2.
An error code appears if something should go wrong during the save operation.
● Save menu
When the SAVE key is pressed in the normal display mode, the save menu panel
is displayed. Use the ↑ and ↓ keys to select the desired menu.
Press the ENTER key to display the desired menu in the message display panel.
The DISP key returns you to the normal display mode.
↓
↑
●
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS
● Procedures for formatting cards
This procedure is used to format memory cards so that they can be used with the
DCP552. A card has to be formatted once only. Note that any programs or
parameters on a card that is formatted are deleted in this process.
● Procedures for saving single programs
This procedure is used to save one program on the DCP552 to a memory card.
↑ ↓ ← →
↑ ↓ ← →
↓
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS
● Procedures for saving all programs
This procedure saves all programs on the DCP552 on a memory card. The
program numbers used in the DCP552 are converted to file names on the memory
card.
When the “Overwrite” save function is selected, files on the card that have the
same number as those in the DCP552 are overwritten by the DCP552 files.
When the “Skip” save function is selected, files on the card that have the same
number as those in the DCP552 are left as they are and the next number file is
selected for processing.
← →
● Procedures for saving setup data
This procedure saves the DCP552 setup data on a memory card.
● Procedures for saving variable parameters
This procedure saves the DCP552 variable parameter data on a memory card.
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS
● Procedures for saving PID parameters
This procedure saves PID parameters and constant value control data on a memory
card.
● Procedures for saving event configuration data
This procedure saves event configuration data on a memory card.
● Procedures for saving all parameters
This procedure saves all parameters on a memory card.
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS
9 - 3
Load Procedures
Insert a memory card when the DCP552 is in the READY mode and the normal display mode, and variable
parameter PA05 has been set to 0. Press the LOAD key to start a load operation. “CArd ” is displayed in display
panel 1 and “LOAd ” is displayed in display panel 2. An error code appears if something should go wrong during
the save operation.
● Load menu
When the LOAD key is pressed in the normal display mode, the load menu panel
is displayed. Use the ENTER key to select the desired menu.
Press the ENTER key to display the desired menu in the message display panel.
The DISP key returns you to the normal display mode.
Note, however, that an autoload operation is performed when the LOAD key is
pressed and variable parameter PA05 is set to 1.
For details, see “ Section 9-4 Autoload” (page 9-10. )
A RAM memory card whose internal batteries are too low, cause a card battery
alarm panel to be displayed before the Load menu panel is displayed.
↓
↑
●
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
●
●
●
●
●
●
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS
● Card battery alarm panel
When the voltage of the internal battery in a RAM card is too low, the data saved
on the disk may be corrupted. Loading corrupted data onto the DCP552 will
cause maloperation. Do not use a card whose battery voltage is too low. If you
want to load the data anyway, select “Ignore” in this panel and press the ENTER
key. This displays the load menu. To return to the normal display mode, select
“Quit” or press the ENTER key or the DISP key.
←, →
● Procedures for loading individual programs
This procedure loads single memory card files on the DCP552.
↑ ↓, ← →
↑ ↓, ← →
↓
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS
● Procedures for loading all programs
This procedure loads all programs on the memory card in the DCP552. The file
numbers used on the memory card are converted to file numbers used in the
DCP552.
When the “Overwrite” load function is selected, programs in the DCP552 that
have the same number as those on the card are overwritten by the card programs.
When the “Skip” load function is selected, programs in the DCP552 that have the
same number as those on the card are left as they are and the next number is
selected for processing.
← →
● Procedures for loading setup data
This procedure loads setup data on the memory card onto the DCP552.
● Procedures for loading variable parameters
This procedure loads variable parameters on the memory card onto the DCP552.
● Procedures for loading PID parameters
This procedure loads PID parameters and constant value control data on the
memory card onto the DCP552.
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS
● Procedures for loading event configuration data
This procedure loads event configuration data on the memory card onto the
DCP552.
● Procedures for loading all parameters
This procedure loads all parameters on the memory card onto the DCP552.
Handling Precautions
The DCP552 Mark II and the old model, DCP552, differ in how some setup
data items are processed and the range of variable parameter PA15. Thus
the following changes have to be made when setup data, variable
parameters or all parameters saved on a DCP552 are loaded onto a
DCP552 Mark II.
• Setup data
: C21, C22, C45 to C50, C80, C90 to C97
• Variable parameters : PA15, PA25
Setup data and all parameters stored on a DCP552 Mark II cannot be
loaded onto a DCP552. (A loading attempt generates card error 16.)
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS
9 - 4
Autoload
Insert a memory card, press the LOAD key or use external switch inputs in the READY mode and the normal
display mode to load file number 1 in CH1 and CH2 on the memory card as program 1 onto the DCP552.
● Key operated autoload procedure
● Conditions
Memory card
: Program has been saved to file number 1
Variable parameter : PA05 set to 1
Mode
: READY mode, normal display mode
● Operation and action
Insert a memory card and press the LOAD Key.
The DCP552 operates as follows.
• “AUtO ” is displayed in display panel 1 and “LOAd ” is displayed in display
panel 1.
• When program number 1 has been loaded onto the DCP552, program number
1 disappears.
• File number 1 on a memory card is loaded onto the DCP552 as program
number 1.
• When a load operation is successful, the “AUtO ” and “LOAd ” indications go
off and the normal display mode appears.
Unless the number of a program is selected using external switch inputs,
program 1 in segment 1 is selected.
• If the load operation fails, the “AUtO ” and “LOAd ” indications stay on and an
error code is displayed in the message panel.
When an error has occurred, press the DISP key to return to the normal display
mode.
Handling Precautions
A normal load operation cannot be performed when variable parameter
PA05 is set to 1. A normal load operation requires that parameter PA05 is
set to 0.
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS
● Auto load using external switch inputs
● Conditions
Memory card : Program saved to file number 1
Setup data : any of C71 to C74 is set to 8 (autoload)
Mode : READY mode, normal display mode
● Operation and action
Insert a memory card and turn off the external switch used for autoload and turn it
back on again.
The DCP552 operates as follows.
• “AUtO ” is displayed in display panel 1 and “LOAd ” is displayed in display
panel 2.
• When program number 1 has been loaded onto the DCP552, program number
1 disappears.
• File number 1 on a memory card is loaded onto the DCP552 as program
number 1.
• When a load operation is successful, the “AUtO ” and “LOAd ” indications go
off and the normal display mode appears.
Unless the number of a program is selected using external switch inputs,
program 1 in segment 1 is selected.
• If the load operation fails, the “AUtO ” and “LOAd ” indications stay on and an
error code is displayed in the message panel.
When an error has occurred, press the DISP key to return to the normal display
mode.
Handling Precautions
Variable parameter PA05 can be set to 1 or 0.
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS
9 - 5
Error Message List
When an error occurs, error messages such as “Card Error-XX” (XX denotes error code) are displayed on the
message panel during memory card operations. The table below lists the error codes and explain their meaning.
Memory card operations are aborted when an error occurs.
To return to the normal display mode, press the DISP key.
Code
Meaning
Remedial measures
1
2
Card insertion failure or card removed Do over.
Card write protect
Card read protect
Bad card
Replace the card, or reset the protect by SLP550.
3
Replace the card, or reset the protect by SLP550.
4
Replace the card.
Initialize the card.
Erase unnecessary files, or initialize the card.
Do over.
5
Invalid card format
Card full
6
7
Card busy
8
File write protect
Card access error
Card access sequence error
FAT abnormal
Initialize the card.
Do over.
9
11
12
14
Do over.
Initialize the card.
Do over.
Card access sequence error
(in file control)
15
Card battery voltage drop (warning) Replace the card, replace the card battery (If
replaceable).
16
17
18
19
20
21
Wrong file version
Create new file, and create new data.
Create new file, and create new data.
Delete unnecessary programs in the DCP552.
Data or file are missing.
DCP552 data full (program load)
DCP552 hardware error (load error) Do over.
Card data invalid
Do over.
Card data check sum error
(program data)
Operate the instrument again, or check
the program setting of the DCP552.
22 to 36 Card data check sum error
(parameter data)
Operate the instrument again, or check
the parameter setting of the DCP552.
37
Memory protect error
(loading the data is protected by the cancel protection.
Set DCP552 variable parameter PA02 to 0 to
variable parameter PA02.)
43
44
63
64
No alternate areas remain on the
E2PROM card
Replace the card.
Error occurred in writing to alternate Replace the card.
area on E2PROM card
Card battery voltage drop (error)
Replace the card, replace the card battery (If
replaceable).
File abnormal (card was removed) Create new file, and create new data.
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 1
Self-Diagnostic Functions and Alarm Code Displays
The DCP552 is equipped with the self-diagnostic functions described below. Alarm codes and the result of self-
diagnostics are listed on the following pages.
■ Power ON self-diagnostic routines
■ RAM backup failures
This routine is designed to detect errors in the RAM backup function. When a
failure is detected, a general reset is performed. No alarm code is displayed.
■ Board configuration failures
This routine detects failures caused when boards (circuit boards) not designed to
be used with the DCP552. Alarm codes are displayed when errors are detected.
■ Self-diagnostic routines performed each sampling cycle
■ Analog input failures
Failures are detected when the analog input signal due to disconnection or other
cause lies outside the –10.0 to +110.0% range.
Alarm codes are displayed when errors are detected.
■ Self-diagnostic routines performed continuously during operation
■ PROM failures
This routine is designed to detect errors in system programs stored in the PROM.
Not totally infallible, there are cases where errors go undetected and result in
measuring device operation failure.
Alarm codes are displayed when errors are detected.
■ Adjustment data failures
This routine detects errors in analog inputs and output adjustment data stored in
non-volatile memory. Alarm codes are displayed when errors are detected.
■ Program failures
This routine detects failures in program setting data stored in a backup RAM.
Alarm codes are displayed when errors are detected.
■ Parameter failures
This routine detects failures in parameters stored in a backup RAM. Alarm codes
are displayed when errors are detected.
■ Low battery voltage
This routine detects low voltage conditions in the battery that backups RAM data.
The BAT LED on the console goes on when battery voltage is too low.
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Alarm code display
The DCP552 is designed to alternate display of the following alarm codes and
normal display items in one-second intervals on display panel 1 when input
failures or instrument system failures are detected.
In cases of multiple alarm codes, display of the codes is alternated with normal
display items, starting in order from the alarm code with the smallest number.
■ Alarm classification
PV range alarm group
: AL01 to AL04
Measuring instrument alarm group : AL90 to AL99, and battery voltage drop
(In case of battery voltage drop, BAT LED
of the console is flickered.)
Alarm
code
Alarm name
Contents
Countermeasure
AL01
AL02
AL03
AL04
AL90
AL92
PV1 overrange
PV1 underrange
PV2 overrange
PV2 underrange
PV1 is more than 110%FS. Check PV1.
PV1 is less than –10%FS.
PV2 is more than 110%FS. Check PV2
PV2 is less than –10%FS.
Board configuration failure Incorrect board configuration Request the repair.
Adj ustment value is abnormal.Analog input/output
adj ustment data were broken.
Request the repair.
AL93
AL94
AL95
AL96
AL97
AL99
Setup data is abnormal.Setup data were broken. Check the setup data, and reset
the data.
Variable parameter is abnormal. Variable parameter were Check the variable parameter,
broken.
and reset the data.
PID parameter is abnormal. PID parameter were broken
(Fixed command control data is abnormal.)
.
Check the PID parameter,
and reset the data.
Program data is abnormal. Program data were broken
.
Check the program data,
and reset the data.
Event configuration data Event configuration data Check the event configuration data,
is abnormal.
were broken.
and reset the data.
PROM is abnormal. System program were corrupted. Request the repair.
*1: When AL90 is generated, the alarm code stays on and continued
operation is disabled.
*2: Data checks performed by AL93 and AL97 may fail to detect
corrupted data. When this happens, the alarm can be turned off by
entering normal data.
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 2
Key Input Related Problems
Procedures to correct key input related problems are described below.
■ Normal display mode problems
■ Modes and channels cannot be changed using keys
■ Program number does not start flashing when PROG key is pressed
ConSt
PA01
■ RUN mode cannot be invoked with the RUN/HOLD key
Cause
Measure
Program selected in READY mode is unset. Select the set program.
It is not possible to change to the RUN mode
if CH1 and CH2 programs are not set in
synchronous mode (variable parameter
PA04 set to 1)
Set to END mode.
Set READY mode to execute RESET operation (PROG +
RUN/HOLD keys).
Set to key lock.
Set variable parameter PA01 between 0 to 2.
■ HOLD mode cannot be invoked with the RUN/HOLD key
ConSt
PA01
■ RESET cannot be performed with the PROG, RUN and HOLD keys.
RESET is available in the READY program run mode and returns operations to
the first segment.
PA01
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
■ ADV cannot be invoked with PROG and DISP keys
ConSt
PA01
■ FAST mode cannot be invoked with FUNC and → keys
C62
ConSt
PA01
■ MANUAL mode cannot be invoked with A/M key
P
P
PA01
PA01
■ AUTO mode cannot be invoked with A/M key
■ Autotuning (AT) cannot be started with AT key
PA08
PA08
PA93
PA93
PA08
PA01
PA93
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Autotuning cannot be canceled with AT key
PA01
■ PID parameter setting state cannot be invoked with PID key
■ Event configuration setting state cannot be invoked with FUNC and PARA keys
PA01
■ Setup data setting state cannot be invoked with SETUP key
PA01
■ Fixed command control data setting state cannot be invoked with FUNC and PID keys
PA01
■ Program setting state cannot be invoked with FUNC and PROG keys
ConSt
PA01
■ Program copy cannot be performed with ↑ and PROG keys
ConSt
PA02
PA01
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
■ General reset cannot be performed with FUNC, CLR and MESSAGE keys
PA02
PA01
■ Parameter setting related problems
■ Registration state cannot be invoked with ENTER key
PA02
■ Program setting related problems
■ Registration state cannot be invoked with ENTER key
PA02
■ Item changes cannot be made with ↑ and ↓ keys
■ SP values in program settings cannot be changed with ↑ and ↓ keys
C66 C67 C69
C70
■ Event items cannot be displayed with ↑ and ↓ keys
C64
C57
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
■ PID group, output limiter group number items cannot be displayed with ↑ and ↓ keys
C58
■ G.SOAK items, PV shift items and repeat items cannot be displayed with ↑ and ↓ keys
C59
■ PV start items, cycle items and pattern link items cannot be displayed with ↑ and ↓ keys
C60
■ Segment insertion and deletion cannot be confirmed with FUNC and ENTER keys
PA02
■ Program deletion cannot be confirmed with FUNC and ENTER keys during pattern item
registration
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10 - 3
When the BAT LED Flashes
Handling Precautions
Batteries that have been stored for long periods have been subj ect to self-
discharge and have a short service life. If required, buy new batteries.
■ BAT LED flashes
The BAT LED starts flashing when low battery voltage is detected. The voltage
level set in memory that trigger the LED is higher than minimum level required
for storing data.
Thus data loss is thus not imminent when the LED starts flashing.
Note, however, that memory data corruption has probably occurred when the BAT
LED starts flashing at power up after the DCP552 has been stored for long
periods disconnected from the power line.
■ Replacing the battery
Parameter settings and program settings are stored in RAM memory. The RAM is
backed up by a battery and data persist through a power down. When the battery is
depleted, turning off the DCP552 causes the data stored in RAM to be lost.
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the power supply when you are replacing the batteries.
Failure to heed this warning may lead to electric shock.
Be sure not to touch internal components during battery replacement or j ust
after the power has been turned. This may result in burn inj uries.
• Make sure that the batteries are inserted with the plus (+) and minus (–)
poles correctly oriented.
• Do not use damaged batteries or batteries that leak.
• Do not throw batteries into a fire, recharge, disassemble or expose them to
heat.
• Store batteries in a cool, dry place.
Failure to heed these cautions may result in burns or battery leakage.
Batteries should be kept out of reach of children, since they may swallow
them. Should a child swallow a battery, contact a doctor immediately.
Do not throw used batteries into a fire or discard them as general garbage,
but return them to Honeywell sales/service office or the dealer from whom
you purchased the equipment.
Before you touch internal components, be sure to discharge any static
electricity on your body by touching a metal ground connector. Failure to
heed this caution may lead to equipment damage.
■ Items to be provided by the user
• Phillips screwdriver
• New lithium battery: model number 81446140-001
10-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Battery replacement procedures
Handling Precautions
• Replace the old battery with a lithium battery (model No.:81446140-
001). Batteries can be ordered from Honeywell sales or service office.
• Do not use metal tools to remove or attach battery connectors as this
could short-circuit electric circuits inside.
• A capacitor backs up the memory during battery replacement. To charge
this capacitor, supply power to the DCP552 for about 10 minutes.
Replace the battery less than 24 hours after the power supply has been
turned off.
When the BAT LED starts flashing, replace the battery according to the following
instructions.
(1) Leave the power on for 10 minutes.
(2) Turn off the power.
(3) Open the console key cover and remove the lock screw under the ENTER
key using a Phillips screwdriver.
>>Slide the controller out of the case.
10-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
(4) To prevent static discharges, remove all static electricity from your body.
(5) Slide the controller completely out of the case.
>>The battery is located on the right side as seen from the front of the controller.
(6) Place the controller on a desk upside-down so that the battery is easily
accessible.
(7) Disconnect the connectors.
(8) Open the tab on the black clip that secures the battery and lift out the battery.
(9) Remove the old battery from the clip.
(10)Insert the new battery in the clip.
(11)Orient the positive pole of the battery forwards and press the clip with the
battery into the square opening.
(12)Insert the connectors in the printed circuit board.
(13)Slide the controller back into the case.
(14)Open the key cover and firmly tighten the lock screw under the ENTER key
using a Phillips screwdriver.
(15)When all procedures have been completed, affix a label giving the date when
the battery should be replaced next time in an easy to see location on the
controller.
(16)Turn on the power to make sure that the BAT LED does not go on.
10-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE
• Guidelines for battery service life are given below.
When the DCP552 is stored with the power off under standard conditions
(ambient temperature 23±2°C): 5 years
When the DCP552 is stored with the power on under standard conditions
(ambient temperature 23±2°C): 10 years
Battery life is reduced when stored at higher temperatures.
• When the BAT LED is flashing, memory data is protected if the power is on.
• When the data in memory is corrupted, one of the following two conditions will
occur.
(1) “g.rESt ” is displayed at power up and normal operation cannot be
performed.
(Press the ENTER key to perform a general reset and reset
parameters to their factory default values and delete all program
settings.)
(2) Normal operation can be started at power up but one of the alarm
codes AL93 to AL97 are displayed.
10-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. SPECIFICATIONS
11 - 1
Specifications
θ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. SPECIFICATIONS
11-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. SPECIFICATIONS
µ
11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. SPECIFICATIONS
11-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. SPECIFICATIONS
×
×
11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. SPECIFICATIONS
11-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. SPECIFICATIONS
■ Attachment/auxiliary devices list
11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. SPECIFICATIONS
11 - 2
External Dimensions
■ DCP552
Unit : mm
15.5
9
185
3
144
137
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
PROG
SEG
PV
DEV
OUT
CYC
SP
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
PROFILE
RUN
AT
HLD
MAN
PRG
BAT
EG1
EG2
TM
SYN
25 26
29 30
27 28
31 32
ADV
PROG RUN/HOLD DISP
RESET
MESSAGE
33 34
37 38
35 36
39 40
MESSAGE
A/M
PID
AT
PARA
CLR
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
FUNC
SETUP
ENTER
LOAD LOADER SAVE
CARD
7
■ Soft dust-proof cover set (optional) Model No. : 81446141-001
(silicon rubber, transparent)
Unit : mm
1
13
1
147
143
131
11-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
This chapter covers the field calibrations procedures for the inputs, outputs and various functions of the DCP550
mark II controller after shipment from the factory. When calibration is made in the field, the original factory data
is erased, and so the specified input/output accuracies of the controller cannot be assured. This manual is for users
who are conversant with DCP550 mark II use and operation.
■ Precautions before calibration
Apply power and allow the controller to warm up for 2 hours before you calibrate
the DCP550 mark II. Confirm that the test equipment needed for calibration has
stabilized.
Factory calibration has been made at a stable temperature of 23.0°C (±2°C).
Calibrate the DCP550 mark II in this range, and where there are no significant
fluctuations in air temperature.
You must write newly calibrated data to EEPROM before exiting from calibration
mode, otherwise all new data will be lost.
If calibration equipment of a lower grade than specified below is used, calibration
results may be unsatisfactory.
■ Equipment needed
(1) Standard input source with ±0.02% accuracy (having more than 5 effective
digits and capable of generating both voltage and current outputs)
(2) Decade resistance box with ±0.02% accuracy (having a range of 10 to 300W
with a resolution of more than 0.01W)
(3) Digital ammeter with ±0.02% accuracy (measurable in the range of 4 to 20mA
with assured resolution of more than 0.01mA)
(4) Thermometer with ±0.1°C accuracy (resolution of more than 0.1°C)
12-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
12 - 1
Quick Reference Table for Calibration Items
DCP550 mark II controllers are numbered using the following format. Format items may require different
calibration procedures, as shown in Table 12-1.
✽ ✽✽✽✽✽
Table 12-1. Calibration Items for Each Model
12-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
Table 12-2. Item and Sub Item Table for Calibration
0000
AdJS
1011
1111
2022
AdJS
AdJS
AdJS
1111
6066
1111
7077
1111
12-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
01 00
01 01
01 02
01 03
00 04
01 05
00 00
0.0.0.0.
A d J S
1.0.1.1.
A d J S
00 01
00000
A d J S
00000
A d J S
00 03
00 04
00 05
0.0.0.0.
1.1.1.1.
Figure 12-1. Calibration Flowchart (1/3)
12-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
06 00
02 00
02 01
02 02
2.0.2.2.
A d J S
6.0.6.6.
A d J S
06 01
06 02
06 08
02 08
02 09
06 09
0.0.0.0.
0.0.0.0.
1.1.1.1.
1.1.1.1.
Figure 12-1. Calibration Flowchart (2/3)
12-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
07 00
07 01
07 02
7.0.7.7.
A d J S
0.0.0.0.
0.0.0.0.
1.1.1.1.
Figure 12-1. Calibration Flowchart (3/3)
12-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
12 - 2
Calibration Procedures
■ Enter calibration mode
(1) Release keylock. (PARA PA01=0)
(2) Press DISP key to permit ordinary indication condition.
Change to READY (RUN and HLD are off) and AUTO (MAN off) modes.
The following LEDs will illuminate after the above operations.
RUN LED is OFF
HLD LED is OFF
MAN LED is OFF
Figure 12-2.
(3) To enter calibration mode, hold down the FUNC key, and press SETUP key
and ENTER key simultaneously.
The display will show the symbols described in Figure 12-3. If the indication
is different, repeat the above procedure after pushing DISP key to refresh the
display.
(4) To select individual calibration items, press ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys to select the
item by scrolling, then SETUP key, and ENTER key.
The order of calibration items is described in Table 12-2.
00 00
0.0.0.0.
A.d.J.S.
Figure 12-3.
12-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
■ Function test
Press ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys to show (0.0.0.0) on upper display, then press ENTER
key.
■ Key test (00-01)
Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (00-01).
When you press each key, the data appears in the upper display (shown in Table
12-3) and in the lower display (shown in Table 12-4).
Table 12-3. Upper Display
2.0.0.0
0.2.0.0.
0.4.0.0.
0.0.4.0.
0.0.2.0
1.0.0.0.
0.8.0.0.
0.0.1.0.
0.0.0.8.
0.0.0.2.
Table 12-4. Lower Display
2.0.0.0.
1.0.0.0.
0.4.0.0.
4.0.0.0.
0.8.0.0.
0.2.0.0.
Handling Precautions
1. When you press DISP key, calibration mode will be exited.
2. When you press SETUP key, the next calibration menu will be entered
(Display test).
12-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
■ Display test (00-02)
Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (00-02).
Then, each 7-segment LED, LED indicators and LCD illuminates at every 1 sec.
This is to check if each LED/LCD illuminates.
■ Digital input test (00-03)
Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (00-03).
When you turn on or off each remote switch, the upper display will show the data
described in Table 12-5.
Table 12-5. DI
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
0.0.0.0.
0.0.0.1.
0.0.0.2.
0.0.0.4.
0.0.0.8.
0.0.1.0.
0.0.2.0.
0.0.4.0.
0.0.8.0.
0.1.0.0.
0.2.0.0.
0.4.0.0.
0.8.0.0.
1.0.0.0.
2.0.0.0.
4.0.0.0.
8.0.0.0.
■
12-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
■ Digital output test for control output (00-04)
Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (00-04).
When the digit of upper display is changed by ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys, the state of 6D
or 8D control output is changed as shown in Table 12-6.
Since the 6D hardware is of current output (8D hardware is of open collector)
specification, the ON/OFF check must be performed in meeting with the
specification.
Table 12-6.
0.0.0.0.
0.0.0.1.
0.0.0.2.
0.0.0.4.
0.0.0.8.
■ Digital output test for event (00-05)
Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (00-05).
Table 12-7. DO
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
0.0.0.0.
0.0.0.1.
0.0.0.2.
0.0.0.4.
0.0.0.8.
0.0.1.0.
0.0.2.0.
0.0.4.0.
0.0.8.0.
0.1.0.0.
0.2.0.0.
0.4.0.0.
0.8.0.0.
1.0.0.0.
2.0.0.0.
4.0.0.0.
8.0.0.0.
12-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
■ Built-in clock adjustment
Figure 12-4.
Example:
A: 2 digits of calendar year
1993 ……………………93
April ……………………04
5th day …………………05
3PM ……………………15
6 minutes ………………06
Not changeable
B: Month
C: Day
D: Hour (24 hour system)
E: Minute
F: Second
NOTE
1. ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys are used to change the values, and ENTER key is used to store
the values.
2. Clock is still progressing the operation even after the calibration step is moved to this
built-in clock adjustment item. After entering the changing mode by ENTER key,
the clock stops.
3. After pressing ENTER key, the clock starts from 0 second.
4. Writing to EEPROM is not necessary.
■ PV calibration
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys to show (1011) on upper display, then press ENTER key.
■ Input CH No. select
Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (01-01).
Input the channel No. by ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys ( ENTER key not required).
Table 12-8.
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1
■ Gain No. select
Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (01-02). Connect calibration
device (See Section “12-3 Set Up”).
Input the gain number (See Table 12-9 and Table 12-10) by scrolling ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys
the upper display ( ENTER key not required).
12-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
■ PV z ero, span
(1) PV zero adj ustment
(a) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (01-03).
(b) Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to the 0% range
value (See Table 12-9), the signal need to be on the input for 10 to 15
seconds.
(c) Press ENTER key after display stabilizes.
(2) PV span adj ustment
(a) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (01-04).
(b) Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to the 100% range
value (See Table 12-9).
(c) Press ENTER key after display stabilizes.
Table 12-9.
■ Writing into EEPROM
Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (01-05).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys to show (1.1.1.1.) on the upper display.
Press ENTER key.
12-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
Table 12-10.
12-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
■ Cold junction sensor calibration
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys to show (2022) on upper display, then press ENTER
key.
■ The cold junction input 0% (CH1)
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-01).
(2) Connect the millivolt source between (55)(–) and (56)(+), and then input 0.2V
(See Figure 12-10).
(3) Press ENTER key after display stabilizes, AD count is shown on lower
display.
■ The cold junction input 100% (CH1)
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-02).
(2) Connect the millivolt source between (55)(–) and (56)(+), and then input 1.0V
(See Figure 12-10).
(3) Press ENTER key after display stabilizes, AD count is shown on lower
display.
■ The cold junction AD count data (CH1)
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-03).
(2) Press ENTER key after display stabilizes, AD count is shown on lower
display.
■ The cold junction temperature data (CH1)
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-04).
(2) Connect the thermometer (55).
(3) Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys to set above temperature value.
(4) Press ENTER key.
■ The cold junction input 0% (CH2)
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-05).
(2) Connect the millivolt source between (58)(–) and (59)(+), and then input 0.2V
(See Figure 12-10).
(3) Press ENTER key after display stabilizes, AD count is shown on lower
display.
■ The cold junction input 100% (CH2)
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-06).
(2) Connect the millivolt source between (58)(–) and (59)(+), and then input 1.0V
(See Figure 12-10).
(3) Press ENTER key after display stabilizes, AD count is shown on lower
display.
■ The cold junction AD count data (CH2)
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-07).
(2) Press ENTER key after display stabilizes, AD count is shown on lower
display.
■ The cold junction temperature data (CH2)
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-08).
(2) Connect the thermometer (58).
(3) Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys to set above temperature value.
(4) Press ENTER key.
12-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
■ Writing into EEPROM
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-09).
(2) Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys to show (1.1.1.1.) on upper display.
(3) Press ENTER key.
■ Current output calibration
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys to show (6.0.6.6.) on the upper display, then press
ENTER key.
Connect the digital ammeter across terminals (See Figure 12-9).
■ OUT CH1 output calibration
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (06-01).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys until meter indicates 4.00mA, then press ENTER
key.
(2) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (06-02).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys until meter indicates 20.00mA, then press ENTER
key.
■ OUT CH2 output calibration
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (06-03).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys until meter indicates 4.00mA, then press ENTER
key.
(2) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (06-04).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys until meter indicates 20.00mA, then press ENTER
key.
■ AUX CH1 output calibration
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (06-05).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys until meter indicates 4.00mA, then press ENTER
key.
(2) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (06-06).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys until meter indicates 20.00mA, then press ENTER
key.
■ AUX CH2 output calibration
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (06-07).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys until meter indicates 4.00mA, then press ENTER
key.
(2) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (06-08).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys until meter indicates 20.00mA, then press ENTER
key.
12-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
■ Writing into EEPROM
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (06-09).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys to show (1.1.1.1.) on upper display.
(2) Press ENTER key.
■ Carbon potential code calibration
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys to show (7.0.7.7.) on upper display, then press ENTER
key.
■ Carbon potential code calibration
Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (07-01).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys to show (x.x.x.x.) on upper display, then press ENTER
key (See Table 12-11).
■ Writing into EEPROM
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (07-02).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, →, keys to show (1.1.1.1.) on upper display.
(2) Press ENTER key.
Table 12-11. Carbon Potential Code
0.0.0.0.
0.0.0.1.
12-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
12 - 3
Set Up
Figure 12-5. Thermocouple Inputs
Figure 12-6. RTD Inputs
Figure 12-7. RTD Inputs
Figure 12-8. mV, V, Inputs
Figure 12-9. mA Inputs
Figure 12-10. CJ, O2 Sensor
12-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12. CALIBRATION
Figure 12-11. Current Outputs
12-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP551/552 Program Work Sheet Program No.
Preparation date:
Equipment name:
Product name :
[Pattern graph]
SP
(Unit :
)
Time (Unit: hr-min, min-sec, 0.1sec)
16 17 18 19 20
[Programming Map]
Segment item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Program contents
(1)SP
Pattern
(2)Time, θ, ∆SP
Event 1
(1)
(
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
(2)
Event 2
(1)
(
(2)
Event 3
(1)
(
(2)
(1)
Event 4
(2)
(
(1)
Event 5
(2)
(
(1)
Event 6
(2)
(
(1)
Event 7
(2)
(
(1)
Event 8
(
(2)
Event 9
(1)
(
(2)
Event 10
(1)
(
(2)
Event 11
(1)
(
(2)
Event 12
(1)
(
(2)
Event 13
(1)
(
(2)
Event 14
(1)
(
(2)
(1)
Event 15
(2)
(
(1)
Event 16
(
(2)
(1)PID group
(2)Output limiter group
(1)Type
PID group or Output limiter group
G.SOAK
(2)Count
PV shift
Repeat
Shift value
(1)Return segment
(2)Count
PV start
Cycle
Pattern link
Tag
Type
Count
Link destination program
8-character tag
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
User name
:
Preparation date
Product name
Tag name
:
:
:
Equipment name
Model No.
:
:DCP552
Instrumentation staffer in charge :
Business staffer in charge :
■ Variable parameter setting
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
settings
settings
1
2
PA 01
PA 02
Key lock
0
0 : Keylock disabled
1 : Display of setup data settings disabled
2 : Display of all settings disabled
3 : Display of all settings disabled. Operation keys disabled.
Memory protect
0
0 : Disabled
1 : Program settings are protected.
2 : Setup, variable parameters and event configuration
settings are protected.
3 : Setup, variable parameters, event configurations
and program settings are protected.
4 : Setup, variable parameters, event configurations
and PID parameter settings are protected.
5 : Program settings and all parameter settings are protected.
3
4
5
8
PA 03
PA 04
PA 05
PA 08
Display channel setting
0
0
0
0
0 : 2 items are displayed for the selected CH
1 : Simultaneous 2CH display of the same item
Synchronous 2 channel
operation
0: asynchronous
1: synchronous
Program auto load
0 : OFF
1 : ON
Auto-tuning (CH1)
0 : AT not performed
1 : Standard AT performed on currently used PID group
in mode other than READY mode
2 : AT writing overshoot-proof PID values to currently used
PID groups in mode other than READY mode performed
3 : Standard AT performed on PID groups A1 to A7 in
READY mode
4 : AT writing overshoot-proof PID values to PID groups
A1 to A7 in READY mode continuously performed
9
PA 09
Auto-tuning MV lower limit (CH1) 0.0
Auto-tuning MV higher limit (CH1) 100.0
–5.0 to upper limit %
10 PA 10
11 PA 11
12 PA 12
13 PA 13
14 PA 14
Lower limit to +105%
SP bias (CH1)
0 SPU
0.0
–10000 to +10000 SPU (CH1)
0.0 to 120.0sec
PV digital filter (CH1)
PV bias (CH1)
0 PVU
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV1)
0.1 to 110.0% OUT / 0.1sec
Manipulated variable deviation 110.0
limit (CH1)
15 PA 15
16 PA 16
17 PA 17
Time proportional output cycle (CH1) 10
1 to 240sec
On-off control differential (CH1) 50 SPU
0 to 1000 SPUm (CH1)
–5.0 to +105.0%
PID computation initialize
manipulated variable (CH1)
0.0
21 PA 21
22 PA 22
23 PA 23
24 PA 24
SP bias (CH2)
0
-10000 to +10000 SPU (CH2)
0.0 to 120.0sec
PV digital filter (CH2)
PV bias (CH2)
0.0
0 PVU
110.0
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV2)
0.1 to 110.0% OUT/0.1 sec
Manipulated variable
deviation limit (CH2)
25 PA 25
26 PA 26
27 PA 27
31 PA 31
Time proportional output
cycle (CH2)
10
50
0.0
0
1 to 240sec
ON-OFF control differential
(CH2)
0 to 1000 SPU (CH2)
-5.0 to +105.0%
PID computation initialize
manipulated variable (CH2)
Group 1 event number
0 to 16
(0: No delay is specified.)
32 PA 32
33 PA 33
Group 1 delay time
0.0
0
0.0 to 3000.0sec
Group 2 event number
0 to 16
(0: No delay is specified.)
34 PA 34
35 PA 35
Group 2 delay time
0.0
0
0.0 to 3000.0sec
Group 3 event number
0 to 16
(0: No delay is specified.)
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
No. Item code
36 PA 36
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
settings
settings
Group 3 delay time
Group 4 event number
0.0
0.0 to 3000.0sec
0 to 16
(0: No delay is specified.)
37 PA 37
0
38 PA 38
39 PA 39
Group 4 delay time
FAST X
0.0
0
0.0 to 3000.0sec
0: 2 X
1: 10 X
2: 60 X
3 : 120 X
40 PA 40
43 PA 43
CP computation for temperature
compensation
0
0
-1000 to +1000 PVU (CH1)
PID operation initialize (CH1)
0 : No initialization during advance processing and PID
group change
1 : Initializes during advance processing but not during
PID group change.
2 : No initialization during advance processing but initializes
during PID group change.
3 : Initializes both during advance processing and PID
group change.
44 PA 44
PV2 message display mode
0
0 : CP or PO2 display
1 : mV value display
2 : O2 sensor impedance value display
45 PA 45
46 PA 46
51 PA 51
G.SOAK time (CH1)
G.SOAK time (CH2)
2.0
2.0
0.1 to 60.0sec
0.1 to 60.0sec
PV1 equalizer compensation point No. 1 Range lower
limit value
PV1 range lower limit value (tied)
52 PA 52
53 PA 53
54 PA 54
55 PA 55
56 PA 56
57 PA 57
58 PA 58
59 PA 59
60 PA 60
61 PA 61
62 PA 62
63 PA 63
64 PA 64
65 PA 65
66 PA 66
67 PA 67
68 PA 68
69 PA 69
PV1 equalizer compensation amount No. 1 0 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation point No. 2 500 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation amount No. 2 0 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation point No. 3 1000 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation amount No. 3 0 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation point No. 4 1500 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation amount No. 4 0 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation point No. 5 2000 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation amount No. 5 0 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation point No. 6 2500 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation amount No. 6 0 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation point No. 7 3000 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation amount No. 7 0 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation point No. 8 3500 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation amount No. 8 0 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation point No. 9 4000 PVU
PV1 equalizer compensation amount No. 9 0 PVU
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV1)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV1)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV1)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV1)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV1)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV1)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV1)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV1)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV1)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV1)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV1)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV1)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV1)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV1)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV1)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV1)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV1)
PV1 range upper limit value (tied)
PV1 equalizer compensation point No. 10 Range lower
limit value
70 PA 70
71 PA 71
PV1 equalizer compensation amount No. 10 0 PVU
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV1)
PV2 equalizer compensation point No. 1 Low-limit value
of range
PV2 range lower limit value (tied)
72 PA 72
73 PA 73
74 PA 74
75 PA 75
76 PA 76
77 PA 77
78 PA 78
PV2 equalizer compensation amount No. 1 0 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation point No. 2 500 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation amount No. 2 0 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation point No. 3 1000 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation amount No. 3 0 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation point No. 4 1500 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation amount No. 4 0 PVU
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV2)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV2)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV2)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV2)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV2)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV2)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV2)
denotes items settable only on models with CP compensation
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
settings
Settings and descriptions
settings
79 PA 79
80 PA 80
81 PA 81
82 PA 82
83 PA 83
84 PA 84
85 PA 85
86 PA 86
87 PA 87
88 PA 88
89 PA 89
PV2 equalizer compensation point No. 5 2000 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation amount No. 5 0 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation point No. 6 2500 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation amount No. 6 0 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation point No. 7 3000 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation amount No. 7 0 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation point No. 8 3500 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation amount No. 8 0 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation point No. 9 4000 PVU
PV2 equalizer compensation amount No. 9 0 PVU
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV2)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV2)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV2)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV2)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV2)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV2)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV2)
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV2)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV2)
–1000 to +1000 PVU ( PV2 )
PV2 range upper limit value (tied)
PV2 equalizer compensation point No. 10 Range upper
limit value
90 PA 90
93 PA 93
PV2 equalizer compensation amount No. 10 0 PVU
–1000 to +1000 PVU(PV2)
Auto-tuning (CH2)
0
0 : AT not performed
1 : standard AT performed on currently used PID group in
mode other than READY mode.
2 : AT writing overshoot-proof PID values to currently used
PID groups in mode other than READY mode performed.
3 : Standard AT performed on PID groups A1 to A7 in
READY mode.
4 : AT writing overshoot-proof PID values to PID groups A1
to A7 in READY mode continuously performed.
94 PA 94
95 PA 95
96 PA 96
Auto-tuning MV lower limit (CH2) 0.0
Auto-tuning MV upper limit (CH2) 100.0
-5.0 to upper limit %
Lower limit to +105%
PID computation initialize (CH2)
0
0 : No initialization during advance processing and PID
group change
1 : Initializes during advance processing but not during PID
group change
2 : No initialization during advance processing but
initializes during PID group change
3 : Initializes both during advance processing and PID
group change
97 PA 97
CPU computation compensation
0
0 : no compensation
1 : compensates
98 PA 98
99 PA 99
100 PA100
101 PA101
CP value (PV) display lower limit value 0.000
CP value (PV) display upper limit value 4.000
0 to upper limit SPU (CH2)
lower limit to 4000 SPU (CH2)
10.0 to 50.0
Gas constant
23.5
CP computation compensation 0.000
No.1 compensation point
0 SPU (CH2) (tied)
102 PA102
103 PA103
104 PA104
105 PA105
106 PA106
107 PA107
108 PA108
109 PA109
110 PA110
CP computation compensation 0.000
No.1 compensation amount
-1000 to +1000 SPU (CH2)
0 to 2000 SPU (CH2)
CP computation compensation 0.200
No.2 compensation point
CP computation compensation 0.000
No.2 compensation amount
-1000 to +1000 SPU (CH2)
0 to 2000 SPU (CH2)
CP computation compensation 0.400
No.3 compensation point
CP computation compensation 0.000
No.3 compensation amount
-1000 to +1000 SPU (CH2)
0 to 2000 SPU (CH2)
CP computation compensation 0.600
No.4 compensation point
CP computation compensation 0.000
No.4 compensation amount
-1000 to +1000 SPU (CH2)
0 to 2000 SPU (CH2)
CP computation compensation 0.800
No.5 compensation point
CP computation compensation 0.000
No.5 compensation amount
-1000 to +1000 SPU (CH2)
denotes items settable only on models with CP compensation
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
No. Item code
111 PA111
112 PA112
113 PA113
114 PA114
115 PA115
116 PA116
117 PA117
118 PA118
119 PA119
120 PA120
Item
Factory default User
settings
Settings and descriptions
0 to 2000 SPU (CH2)
settings
CP computation compensation 1.000
No.6 compensation point
CP computation compensation 0.000
No.6 compensation amount
-1000 to +1000 SPU (CH2)
0 to 2000 SPU (CH2)
CP computation compensation 1.200
No.7 compensation point
CP computation compensation 0.000
No.7 compensation amount
-1000 to +1000 SPU (CH2)
0 to 2000 SPU (CH2)
CP computation compensation 1.400
No.8 compensation point
CP computation compensation 0.000
No.8 compensation amount
-1000 to +1000 SPU (CH2)
0 to 2000 SPU (CH2)
CP computation compensation 1.600
No.9 compensation point
CP computation compensation 0.000
No.9 compensation amount
-1000 to +1000 SPU (CH2)
0 to 2000 SPU (CH2) (tied)
-1000 to +1000 SPU (CH2)
CP computation compensation 2.000
No.10 compensation point
CP computation compensation 0.000
No.10 compensation amount
denotes items settable only on models with CP compensation
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
■ Event configuration data setting
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
settings
settings
1
2
E01-t
Event 1 event type
0
0 to 253
E01-1
Event 1 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
3
E01-2
Event 1 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
4
5
E02-t
Event 2 event type
0
0 to 253
E02-1
Event 2 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
6
E02-2
Event 2 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
7
8
E03-t
Event 3 event type
0
0 to 253
E03-1
Event 3 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
9
E03-2
Event 3 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
10 E04-t
11 E04-1
Event 4 event type
0
0 to 253
Event 4 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
12 E04-2
Event 4 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
13 E05-t
14 E05-1
Event 5 event type
0
0 to 253
Event 5 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
15 E05-2
Event 5 auxiliary setting 2
----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
16 E06-t
17 E06-1
Event 6 event type
0
0 to 253
Event 6 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
18 E06-2
Event 6 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
19 E07-t
20 E07-1
Event 7 event type
0
0 to 253
Event 7 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
21 E07-2
Event 7 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
22 E08-t
23 E08-1
Event 8 event type
0
0 to 253
Event 8 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
24 E08-2
Event 8 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
( Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
25 E09-t
26 E09-1
Event 9 event type
0
0 to 253
Event 9 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
27 E09-2
Event 9 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
28 E10-t
29 E10-1
Event 10 event type
0
0 to 253
Event 10 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
30 E10-2
Event 10 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
31 E11-t
32 E11-1
Event 11 event type
0
0 to 253
Event 11 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
33 E11-2
Event 11 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
settings
settings
34 E12-t
35 E12-1
Event 12 event type
0
0 to 253
Event 12 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
36 E12-2
Event 12 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
37 E13-t
38 E13-1
Event 13 event type
0
0 to 253
Event 13 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
39 E13-2
Event 13 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
40 E14-t
41 E14-1
Event 14 event type
0
0 to 253
Event 14 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
42 E14-2
Event 14 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
43 E15-t
44 E15-1
Event 15 event type
0
0 to 253
Event 15 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
45 E15-2
Event 15 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
46 E16-t
47 E16-1
Event 16 event type
0
0 to 253
Event 16 auxiliary setting 1
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
48 E16-2
Event 16 auxiliary setting 2
-----
–19999 to +20000
(Setting range is variable according to the event types.)
■ Event type
Event
type
Meaning
Setting
category
Operation
category
Auxiliary settings
0
1
Event off
-----
-----
Auxiliary 1 : None
Auxiliary 1 : None
Auxiliary 1 : Hysteresis
Auxiliary 2 : None
Auxiliary 2 : None
Auxiliary 2 : None
Time event
Segment
Segment
Time
PV
2
PV upper limit
3
PV lower limit
4
Deviation upper limit
Deviation lower limit
Deviation upper limit with standby
Deviation lower limit with standby
Absolute value deviation upper limit
Absolute value deviation lower limit
Absolute value deviation upper limit with standby
Absolute value deviation lower limit with standby
PV deviation rate upper limit
PV deviation rate lower limit
SP upper limit
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Segment
Segment
PV
PV
Auxiliary 1 : Sampling cycle Auxiliary 2 : None
Auxiliary 1 : Hysteresis
Auxiliary 2 : None
SP lower limit
MV upper limit
MV lower limit
Code event
Segment
Code
PV
Auxiliary 1 : No. of output
Auxiliary 1 : Hysteresis
Auxiliary 2 : None
Auxiliary 2 : None
SOAK absolute value deviation upper limit Segment
SOAK absolute value deviation lower limit
SOAK absolute value deviation upper limit with standby
SOAK absolute value deviation lower limit with standby
Code event with timer
Segment
Code time
Auxiliary 1 : No. of output
Auxiliary 2 : None
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
Event
type
Meaning
Setting
category
Operation
category
Auxiliary settings
24 to 63 Event off
-----
-----
Auxiliary 1 : None
Auxiliary 1 : Hysteresis
Auxiliary 2 : None
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Normal PV1 upper limit operation
Normal PV1 lower limit operation
Normal PV2 upper limit operation
Normal PV2 lower limit operation
PV upper limit
Measuring instrument
PV
Auxiliary 2 : Operating point
PV lower limit
Deviation upper limit
Deviation lower limit
Deviation upper limit with standby
Deviation lower limit with standby
Absolute value deviation upper limit
Absolute value deviation lower limit
Absolute value deviation upper limit with standby
Absolute value deviation lower limit with standby
PV deviation rate upper limit
PV deviation rate lower limit
SP upper limit
Measuring instrument
Measuring instrument
PV
PV
Auxiliary 1 : Sampling cycle Auxiliary 2 : Operating point
Auxiliary 1 : Hysteresis
Auxiliary 2 : Operating point
SP lower limit
MV upper limit
MV lower limit
SOAK absolute value deviation upper limit
SOAK absolute value deviation lower limit
SOAK absolute value deviation upper limit with standby
SOAK absolute value deviation lower limit with standby
Program No. binary code
Segment No. binary code
Program No. BCD code
Segment No. BCD code
Specified segment
Measuring instrument
Code
Auxiliary 1 : No. of output
Auxiliary 2 : None
Measuring instrument
Measuring instrument
Measuring instrument
Mode
Time
Time
Auxiliary 1 : Segment specification Auxiliary 2 : None
Auxiliary 1 : Operating point Auxiliary 2 : None
RAMP-E monitoring time
Segment time
Auxiliary 1 : On-time
Auxiliary 2 : OFF-time
Program time
96 to 127 Event off
RUN, HOLD, END, FAST
-----
-----
Auxiliary 1 : None
Auxiliary 2 : None
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
Measuring instrument
Mode
Auxiliary 1 : Depends on channel conditions
Auxiliary 2 : None
HOLD
READY, READY FAST
END
G.SOAK wait
MANUAL
AT executing
FAST, READY FAST
Console setting operation
RUN
Measuring instrument
Measuring instrument
Mode
Mode
Auxiliary 1 : None
Auxiliary 2 : None
Auxiliary 1 : Depends on channel conditions
Auxiliary 2 : None
Advance
All alarms (logical OR)
PV range alarm
Instrument alarm
O2 sensor error
Measuring instrument
Mode
Auxiliary 1 : None
Auxiliary 2 : None
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
Event
type
Meaning
Setting
category
Operation
category
Auxiliary settings
Auxiliary 2 : None
143
144
Event off
Battery voltage drop
-----
-----
Auxiliary 1 : None
Measuring instrument
Mode
-----
145 to 253 Event off
-----
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
■ PID parameter (CH1) setting
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
settings
Settings and descriptions
settings
1
2
3
P-1
I-1
Proportional band (PID group 1) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-Off controi)
Integral time (PID group 1)
Derivative time (PID group 1)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
d-1
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
4
5
6
7
rE-1
oL-1
oH-1
P-2
Manual reset (PID group 1)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 1)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 1)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 2) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
8
9
I-2
Integral time (PID group 2)
Derivative time (PID group 2)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
d-2
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
10 rE-2
11 oL-2
12 oH-2
13 P-3
Manual reset (PID group 2)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 2)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 2)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 3) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
14 I-3
15 d-3
Integral time (PID group 3)
Derivative time (PID group 3)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
16 rE-3
17 oL-3
18 oH-3
19 P-4
Manual reset (PID group 3)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 3)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 3)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 4) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
20 I-4
21 d-4
Integral time (PID group 4)
Derivative time (PID group 4)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
22 rE-4
23 oL-4
24 oH-4
25 P-5
Manual reset (PID group 4)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 4)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 4)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 5) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
26 I-5
27 d-5
Integral time (PID group 5)
Derivative time (PID group 5)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
28 rE-5
29 oL-5
30 oH-5
31 P-6
Manual reset (PID group 5)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 5)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 5)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 6) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
32 I-6
33 d-6
Integral time (PID group 6)
Derivative time (PID group 6)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
34 rE-6
35 oL-6
Manual reset (PID group 6)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 6)
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
The settings on this page are PID parameters for CH1
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
settings
settings
36 oH-6
37 P-7
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 6)
100.0
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
Proportional band (PID group 7) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
38 I-7
39 d-7
Integral time (PID group 7)
Derivative time (PID group 7)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
40 rE-7
41 oL-7
42 oH-7
43 P-8
Manual reset (PID group 7)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 7)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 7)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 8) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
44 I-8
45 d-8
Integral time (PID group 8)
Derivative time (PID group 8)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
46 rE-8
47 oL-8
48 oH-8
49 P-9
Manual reset (PID group 8)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 8)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 8)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 9) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
50 I-9
51 d-9
Integral time (PID group 9)
Derivative time (PID group 9)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
52 rE-9
53 oL-9
54 oH-9
55 P-A1
Manual reset (PID group 9)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 9)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 9)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group A1) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
56 I-A1
57 d-A1
Integral time (PID group A1)
Derivative time (PID group A1)
Manual reset (PID group A1)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
58 rE-A1
59 CP-A1
60 tP-A1
61 P-A2
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A1) 1000 SPU
Tuning point (PID group A1) 500 SPU
Proportional band (PID group A2) 100.0
–19999 to +20000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
62 I-A2
63 d-A2
Integral time (PID group A2)
Derivative time (PID group A2)
Manual reset (PID group A2)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
64 rE-A2
65 CP-A2
66 tP-A2
67 P-A3
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A2) 2000 SPU
Tuning point (PID group A2) 1500 SPU
Proportional band (PID group A3) 100.0
–19999 to +20000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
68 I-A3
69 d-A3
Integral time (PID group A3)
Derivative time (PID group A3)
Manual reset (PID group A3)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
70 rE-A3
71 CP-A3
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A3) 3000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
The settings on this page are PID parameters for CH1
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
settings
settings
72 tP-A3
73 P-A4
Tuning point (PID group A3)
2500 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
Proportional band (PID group A4) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
74 I-A4
75 d-A4
Integral time (PID group A4)
Derivative time (PID group A4)
Manual reset (PID group A4)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
76 rE-A4
77 CP-A4
78 tP-A4
79 P-A5
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A4) 4000 SPU
Tuning point (PID group A4) 3500 SPU
Proportional band (PID group A5) 100.0
–19999 to +20000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
80 I-A5
81 d-A5
Integral time (PID group A5)
Derivative time (PID group A5)
Manual reset (PID group A5)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
82 rE-A5
83 CP-A5
84 tP-A5
85 P-A6
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A5) 5000 SPU
Tuning point (PID group A5) 4500 SPU
Proportional band (PID group A6) 100.0
–19999 to +20000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
86 I-A6
87 d-A6
Integral time (PID group A6)
Derivative time (PID group A6)
Manual reset (PID group A6)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
88 rE-A6
89 CP-A6
90 tP-A6
91 P-A7
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A6) 6000 SPU
Tuning point (PID group A6) 5500 SPU
Proportional band (PID group A7) 100.0
–19999 to +20000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
92 I-A7
93 d-A7
Integral time (PID group A7)
Derivative time (PID group A7)
Manual reset (PID group A7)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
94 rE-A7
95 CP-A7
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A7) 20000SPU
(fixed)
20000 SPU (tied)
96 tP-A7
Tuning point (PID group A7)
6500 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
The settings on this page are PID parameters for CH1
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
■ PID parameter (CH2) setting
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
settings
Settings and descriptions
settings
1
2
3
P-1
I-1
Proportional band (PID group 1) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
Integral time (PID group 1)
Derivative time (PID group 1)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
d-1
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
4
5
6
7
rE-1
oL-1
oH-1
P-2
Manual reset (PID group 1)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 1)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 1))
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 2) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
8
9
I-2
Integral time (PID group 2)
Derivative time (PID group 2)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
d-2
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
10 rE-2
11 oL-2
12 oH-2
13 P-3
Manual reset (PID group 2)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 2)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 2)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 3) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
14 I-3
15 d-3
Integral time (PID group 3)
Derivative time (PID group 3)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
16 rE-3
17 oL-3
18 oH-3
19 P-4
Manual reset (PID group 3)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 3))
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 3)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 4) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
20 I-4
21 d-4
Integral time (PID group 4)
Derivative time (PID group 4)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
22 rE-4
23 oL-4
24 oH-4
25 P-5
Manual reset (PID group 4)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 4))
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 4)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 5) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
26 I-5
27 d-5
Integral time (PID group 5)
Derivative time (PID group 5)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
28 rE-5
29 oL-5
30 oH-5
31 P-6
Manual reset (PID group 5)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 5)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 5)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 6) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
32 I-6
33 d-6
Integral time (PID group 6)
Derivative time (PID group 6)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
34 rE-6
35 oL-6
Manual reset (PID group 6)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 6)
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
The settings on this page are PID parameters for CH2
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
settings
settings
36 oH-6
37 P-7
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 6)
100.0
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
Proportional band (PID group 7) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
38 I-7
39 d-7
Integral time (PID group 7)
Derivative time (PID group 7)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
40 rE-7
41 oL-7
42 oH-7
43 P-8
Manual reset (PID group 7)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 7)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 7)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 8) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
44 I-8
45 d-8
Integral time (PID group 8)
Derivative time (PID group 8)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
46 rE-8
47 oL-8
48 oH-8
49 P-9
Manual reset (PID group 8)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 8)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 8)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group 9) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
50 I-9
51 d-9
Integral time (PID group 9)
Derivative time (PID group 9)
0
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
52 rE-9
53 oL-9
54 oH-9
55 P-A1
Manual reset (PID group 9)
Manipulated variable lower limit (Output limiter group 9)
Manipulated variable upper limit (Output limiter group 9)
50.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
–5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit %
Manipulated variable lower limit to +105.0%
100.0
Proportional band (PID group A1) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
56 I-A1
57 d-A1
Integral time (PID group A1)
Derivative time (PID group A1)
Manual reset (PID group A1)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
58 rE-A1
59 CP-A1
60 tP-A1
61 P-A2
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A1) 1000 SPU
Tuning point (PID group A1) 500 SPU
Proportional band (PID group A2) 100.0
–19999 to +20000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
62 I-A2
63 d-A2
Integral time (PID group A2)
Derivative time (PID group A2)
Manual reset (PID group A2)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
64 rE-A2
65 CP-A2
66 tP-A2
67 P-A3
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A2) 2000 SPU
Tuning point (PID group A2) 1500 SPU
Proportional band (PID group A3) 100.0
–19999 to +20000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
68 I-A3
69 d-A3
Integral time (PID group A3)
Derivative time (PID group A3)
Manual reset (PID group A3)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
70 rE-A3
71 CP-A3
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A3) 3000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
The settings on this page are PID parameters for CH2
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
–19999 to +20000 SPU
settings
settings
72 tP-A3
73 P-A4
Tuning point (PID group A3)
2500 SPU
Proportional band (PID group A4) 100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
74 I-A4
75 d-A4
Integral time (PID group A4)
Derivative time (PID group A4)
Manual reset (PID group A4)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
76 rE-A4
77 CP-A4
78 tP-A4
79 P-A5
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A4) 4000 SPU
Tuning point (PID group A4) 3500 SPU
Proportional band (PID group A5) 100.0
–19999 to +20000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
80 I-A5
81 d-A5
Integral time (PID group A5)
Derivative time (PID group A5)
Manual reset (PID group A5)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
82 rE-A5
83 CP-A5
84 tP-A5
85 P-A6
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A5) 5000 SPU
Tuning point (PID group A5) 4500 SPU
Proportional band (PID group A6) 100.0
–19999 to +20000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
86 I-A6
87 d-A6
Integral time (PID group A6)
Derivative time (PID group A6)
Manual reset (PID group A6)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
88 rE-A6
89 CP-A6
90 tP-A6
91 P-A7
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A6) 6000 SPU
Tuning point (PID group A6) 5500 SPU
Proportional band (PID group A7) 100.0
–19999 to +20000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0: On-off control)
92 I-A7
93 d-A7
Integral time (PID group A7)
Derivative time (PID group A7)
Manual reset (PID group A7)
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
94 rE-A7
95 CP-A7
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Switching point (PID group A7) 20000SPU
(fixed)
20000 SPU (tied)
96 tP-A7
Tuning point (PID group A7)
6500 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU
The settings on this page are PID parameters for CH2
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
■ Setup data setting
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
: Thermocouple
settings
settings
1
C 01
PV1 range number
0
0 to 16
48 to 52 : Linear (DC current and DC voltage)
64 to 71 : Resistance temperature detector
96 to 103 : Resistance temperature detector
128 to 134 : Linear (DC current and DC voltage)
2
C 02
PV1 temperature unit
0
0 : Celsius (°C)
1 : Fahrenheit (°F)
3
4
5
6
7
C 03
C 04
C 05
C 06
C 07
PV1 decimal point position
PV1 linear decimal point position
PV1 linear range lower limit
PV1 linear range upper limit
PV1 cold junction compensation
1
0 to 2
1
0 to 4
0 PVU
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV1)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV1)
10000 PVU
0
0 : Provided (Compensated inside the instrument)
1 : Not provided (Compensated outside the instrument)
8
9
C 08
C 09
PV1 root extraction
0
0 : Not provided
1 : Provided
PV1 root extraction dropout
PV1 cold junction bias
PV2 range number
0.2
0.0
0
0.2 to 10.0% (Ratio to input range)
10 C 10
11 C 11
–1.0 to + 1.0°C
0 to 16
: Thermocouple
48 to 52 : Linear (DC current and DC voltage)
64 to 71 : Resistance temperature detector
96 to 103 : Resistance temperature detector
128 to 134 : Linear (DC current and DC voltage)
135
: O2 sensor (CP)
12 C 12
PV2 temperature unit
0
0 : Celsius (°C)
1 : Fahrenheit (°F)
13 C 13
14 C 14
15 C 15
16 C 16
17 C 17
PV2 decimal point position
PV2 linear decimal point position
PV2 linear range lower limit
PV2 linear range upper limit
PV2 cold junction compensation
1
0 to 2
1
0 to 4
0 PVU
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV2)
–19999 to +20000 PVU(PV2)
10000 PVU
0
0 : Provided (Compensated inside the instrument)
1 : Not provided (Compensated outside the instrument)
18 C 18
PV2 root extraction
0
0 : Not provided
1 : Provided
19 C 19
20 C 20
21 C 21
PV2 root extraction dropout
PV2 cold junction bias
0.2
0.0
1
0.2 to 10.0% (Ratio to input range)
–1.0 to + 1.0°C
Control output system (CH1)
1 : 5G output (Current proportional control output)
2 : 6D output (Voltage time proportional control output) system A
3 : 6D output (Voltage time proportional control output) system B
4 : 8D output (open collector time proportional control output) system A
5 : 8D output (open collector time proportional control output) system B
22 C 22
23 C 23
Control output system (CH2)
Control action (CH1)
1
0
0 : PID — A reverse operation
1 : PID — A normal operation
2 : PID — B reverse operation
3 : PID — B normal operation
24 C 24
30 C 30
Control action (CH2)
PV equalizer
0
0
0 : None
1 : PV1 only
2 : PV2 only
3 : Both PV1 and PV2
31 C 31
32 C 32
33 C 33
End of operation (CH1)
0
0 : READY mode
1 : END mode
Manipulated variable in READY 0.0
mode (CH1)
–5.0 to +105.0%
Manipulated variable setting
in PV overrange (CH1)
0
0: No
1: Yes
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
No. Item code
34 C 34
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
settings
settings
Manipulated variable in PV
overrange (CH1)
0.0
–5.0 to +105.0%
35 C 35
MANUAL change mode (CH1)
0
0 : Smooth
1 : Preset
36 C 36
37 C 37
Preset MANUAL value (CH1)
End of operation (CH2)
0.0
0
–5.0 to +105.0%
0 : READY mode
1 : END mode
38 C 38
39 C 39
40 C 40
41 C 41
Manipulated variable in READY 0.0
mode (CH2)
-5.0 to +105.0%
Manipulated variable setting in
PV overrange (CH2)
0
0: No
1: Yes
Manipulated variable in PV
overrange (CH2)
0.0
0
-5.0 to +105.0%
Manual change mode (CH2)
0 : smooth
1 : preset
42 C 42
43 C 43
Preset MANUAL value (CH2)
0.0
0
-5.0 to +105.0%
0 to 3600sec
Service interruption time when
running can be continued
44 C 44
CP computation type
1
0 : oxygen pressure (PO2) computation
1 : CP computation for NKG sensor
2 : CP computation for Marathon monitors and Cambridge
sensors
3 : CP computation for Corning sensors
4 : CP computation for AACC sensors
5 : CP computation for Barber-Coleman sensors
6 : CP computation for Furnace Control sensors
45 C 45
Auxiliary output 1 type
0
0 : SP1
1 : PV1
2 : Deviation1 (DEV1)
3 : Manipulated variable 1 (MV1)
4 : SP2
5 : PV2
6 : Deviation 2 (DEV2)
7 : Manipulated variable 2 (MV2)
8 : O2 sensor mV input value
46 C 46
47 C 47
48 C 48
Auxiliary output 1 lower limit (4mA) 0 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU (C45 not equal to 3)
–1999.9 to +2000.0% (C45 set to 3)
Auxiliary output 1 upper limit (20mA) 10000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU (C45 not equal to 3)
–1999.9 to +2000.0% (C45 set to 3)
Auxiliary output 2 type
0
0 : SP1
1 : PV1
2 : Deviation1 (DEV1)
3 : Manipulated variable 1 (MV1)
4 : SP2
5 : PV2
6 : Deviation 2 (DEV2)
7 : Manipulated variable 2 (MV2)
8 : O2 sensor mV input value
49 C 49
50 C 50
57 C 57
58 C 58
59 C 59
60 C 60
Auxiliary output 2 lower limit (4mA) 0 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU (C48 not equal to 3)
–1999.9 to +2000.0% (C48 set to 3)
Auxiliary output 2 upper limit (20mA) 10000 SPU
–19999 to +20000 SPU (C48 not equal to 3)
–1999.9 to +2000.0% (C48 set to 3)
Programming item
Event
0
0
0
0
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
Programming item
PID group, output limiter group
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
Programming item
G.SOAK, PV shift, repeat
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
Programming item
PV start, cycle, pattern link
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
denotes items settable only on models with CP compensation
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
No. Item code
61 C 61
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
settings
settings
Programming system
Program time unit
0
0 : RAMP-X and RAMP-T (θ) combined
1 : RAMP-X and RAMP-E (∆SP) combined
62 C 62
0
0 : Hours, min (SPU/hour for RAMP-T)
1 : Min, sec (SPU/min for RAMP-T)
2 : 0.1 sec (SPU/sec for RAMP-T)
63 C 63
Time display (display panel 1
and 2)
0
1
0: Remaining segment time
1: total operation time (after READY → RUN start)
65 C 65
66 C 66
SP decimal point position (CH1)
SP limit lower limit
0 to 4
PV1 range
lower limit
–19999 to +20000 SPU
67 C 67
68 C 68
69 C 69
SP limit upper limit
PV1 range
upper limit
–19999 to +20000 SPU
SP decimal point position (CH2) 1 or 3
0 to 4 on a model without CP compensation.
0 to 3 on a model with CP compensation.
SP limit lower limit (CH2)
PV2 range
lower limit
-19999 to +20000 SPU (CH2) on a model without CP
compensation.
0 to 2000 SPU(CH2) on a model with CP compensation.
70 C 70
71 C 71
SP limit upper limit (CH2)
External switch input RSW5
PV2 range
upper limit
0
0
0
0
0
0 : NOP (does not function)
1 : RAMP-E
2 : FAST
72 C 72
73 C 73
74 C 74
75 C 75
External switch input RSW6
External switch input RSW7
External switch input RSW8
3 : G.SOAK is cleared using OR
4 : G.SOAK is cleared using AND
5 : MANUAL/AUTO
6 : AT start/terminate
7 : NOP (does not function)
8 : Auto load
9 : NOP (does not function)
10: NOP (does not function)
11: O2 sensor check
External switch input RSW9 to 14
(program selection)
0: BCD4 bit + BCD2 bit
1: Binary 6 bits
76 C 76
77 C 77
Communication address
Transmission rate
0
0
0 to 127
0 : 9600bps
1 : 4800bps
2 : 2400bps
3 : 1200bps
78 C 78
79 C 79
Transmission code
0
0
0 : 8 bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
1 : 8 bits, no parity, 2 stop bits
Communication protocol
0 : CPL
1 : ST221 (no PV trend)
2 : ST221 (PV trend)
80 C 80
Communication method
0
0 : RS-485
1 : RS-232C
81 C 81
82 C 82
83 C 83
84 C 84
85 C 85
86 C 86
90 C 90
ROM ID
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
< Description >
ROM ITEM
ROM revision
Data version
CPU board ID
I/O board ID
PID type
Can only be referenced for mechanical service use.
0 : Improved
1 : Compatible with Mark I
91 C 91
92 C 92
93 C 93
94 C 94
PV1 burnout
PV2 burnout
0
0
0
0
0 : Provided
1 : Not provided
0 : Provided
1 : Not provided
Time proportional output system
(CH1)
0: Does not go on a second time in time proportional cycle.
1: Goes on a second time in time proportional cycle.
Time proportional output
system (CH2)
0: Does not go on a second time in time proportional cycle
1: Goes on a second time in time proportional cycle
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
settings
settings
95 C 95
96 C 96
97 C 97
Voltage output tuning (CH1)
Voltage output tuning (CH2)
Communication port
15
15
0
2 to 22mA
2 to 22mA
0 to 15
Uses back plate terminal to setting 0.
Uses loader jack to setting 1 to 15.
98 C 98
99 C 99
100 C100
Special function
0
0 to 255
PV1 zener barrier adjustment
PV2 zener barrier adjustment
—
—
–20.00 to +20.00
–20.00 to +20.00
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCP552 Parameter Work Sheet
■ Fixed command control data (CH1) setting
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
settings
settings
1
ConSt
Control mode
0
0 : Program run mode
1 : Fixed command control mode
2
3
SP
P
Set point
0
Within setup C66 to C67 setting (SP limit)
Proportional band
100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0 : On-off control)
4
5
I
Integral time
Derivative time
Manual reset
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
d
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
6
7
8
rE
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
oL
oH
Manipulated variable lower limit 0.0
Manipulated variable upper limit 100.0
–5.0 to upper limit %
Lower limit to +105.0%
■ Fixed command control data (CH2) setting
No. Item code
Item
Factory default User
Settings and descriptions
settings
settings
1
ConSt
Control mode
0
0 : Program run mode
1 : Fixed command control mode
2
3
SP
P
Set point
0
Within setup C69 to C70 setting (SP limit)
Proportional band
100.0
0.0 to 1000.0%
(0.0 : On-off control)
4
5
I
Integral time
Derivative time
Manual reset
0
0 to 3600sec
(0: no integral operation)
d
0
0 to 1200sec
(0: no derivative operation)
6
7
8
rE
50.0
0.0 to 100.0%
oL
oH
Manipulated variable lower limit 0.0
Manipulated variable upper limit 100.0
–5.0 to upper limit %
Lower limit to +105.0%
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
-A-
Event
Event configuration data
Event on delay
Event output (open collector output) connection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-5, 8-7
ADV
Alarm
Attachment (orig)
AUTO
Auto-tuning (AT)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-27, 5-28
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-1, 7-12
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
10-2
11-7
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-11
4-11
11-8
4-12
6-12
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-25, 5-27
External dimensions•
External switch input connection
External switch operation
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6-16
11-7
Auxiliary device (orig)
Auxiliary output
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
4-10, 5-36, 7-31
-F-
-B-
FAST•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-25, 5-27
5-17, 8-13
Basic functions
BAT LED
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
10-8
10-9
-G-
G.SOAK (Guarantee SOAK)
General reset
Grounding
Battery replacement procedures
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-6, 8-24
4-6
-C-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cable•
Case
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4-3
2-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-H-
Code event
Cold junction compensation
Communication connection
Compensating lead wire
Console
Constant value control•
Constant value control data
Control output
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-12
7-31
4-13
HOLD
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-25, 5-27
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
- I -
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4-3
2-1, 2-2
5-24
Input process
Input type
Installation procedures•
Interference
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-29
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-8
3-4
3-2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-1, 7-36
4-9, 5-32
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Isolating inputs and outputs
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4-18
Control output CH1
Control output CH2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-32
5-33
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-K-
CPL communications•
CR filter
Crimp-style solderless wire connectors
Cycle
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-4
3-2
4-4
Key chord functions
Key cover
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-6
2-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Key input related problems
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
10-3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-21, 8-17
Key lock•
Keys
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-9
2-4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-D-
Data
DC current
DC voltage•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-3, 5-1
-L-
Load procedures (memory card)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-9, 4-7, 4-8
2-9, 4-7, 4-8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
9-6
2-7
2-1
•
•
•
•
Loader jack
Lock screw
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Deleting programs
Display
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8-20
2-2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Display panel 1
Display panel 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2, 2-3
2-2, 2-3
-M-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Main unit
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-1
Dust proof cover
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-2, 11-7, 11-8
Manipulated variable deviation rate limit
MANUAL• 5-25, 5-27, 6-16
Memory card functions 9-1
Memory card operations• 2-6, 9-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-10
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-E-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EG1 LED•
EG2 LED•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-3
2-3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Memory card types
Memory protect
Message display
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
9-1
7-9
END
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-25
9-12
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Error message list (memory card)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2, 2-3
index-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode
Mode display LED
Mode event
Mode transition•
Model number
Mounting bracket
Mounting position•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-24
2-2, 2-3
5-15
5-26 5-27, 5-28
PV start
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-20, 8-16
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-R-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Range no.•
READY
READY FAST
Repeat
RESET
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-5
3-4, 11-7
3-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-24
5-25
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-19, 8-15
5-27
2-8, 4-7
1-4, 4-16
1-4, 4-14, 4-15
5-25, 5-27
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-N-
Resistance temperature detector
RS-232C
RS-485
RUN
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Normal display mode
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2, 2-5
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Normal display mode LEDs•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2
6-2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Normal display mode selection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-O-
-S-
Save procedures (memory card)
On-off control differential
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-10
5-31
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
9-2
O2 sensor check
O2 sensor input
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Segment deletion
Segment insertion
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8-21
8-21
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-9, 4-8
5-27
5-16, 8-12
5-31
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Operation end
Output limiter group
Output processing
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Segment no. display•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2, 2-3
6-11, 6-13
10-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Selecting programs
Self-diagnostic•
Setting parameters
Setup data
SP limit
Specifications•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-5, 7-1, 7-4
7-1, 7-24
-P-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Panel cutout dimension
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-32
11-1
Parameter
Pattern
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-3, 5-1
5-2, 8-5
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Square-root extraction
ST221
SYN
Synchronous mode
5-29, 5-30, 7-31
1-4, 4-17
2-2
2-2, 5-17, 5-28
Pattern link
PID automatic group selection
PID computation initialize
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-22, 8-18
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-16
7-11
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PID computation initialize manipulated variable• 7-11
PID group• 5-16, 8-12
PID parameter 7-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-T-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tag
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-23, 8-19
2-1,4-5
4-4
2-1, 11-7
4-5
2-8, 4-7
7-32
5-5
7-33
PID parameter CH1
PID parameter CH2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-18
7-21
Terminal base
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Terminal connection•
Terminal cover
Terminal layout
Thermocouple
Time display•
Time events
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power supply
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4-6
6-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power supply on
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Profile display•
Program
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2, 2-3, 6-2
1-3, 5-1, 5-2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Program autoload•
Program copy
Program no. display
Program opertion
Programming map
Programming setup
PV deviation rate event
PV event
PV input (analog input connection)
PV shift•
•
•
7-10, 9-10
2-6, 8-23
2-2, 2-3
5-24
8-4
2-5, 8-1
5-11
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Time proportional output system
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-V-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Variable parameter•
Varistor
Voltage output control•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-1, 7-5
3-2
7-33
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-8
4-7
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-W-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-18, 8-14
Wiring
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4-1
index-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History
Printed Manual Number
Date
Edition
Revised pages
Description
97-12 EN1I-6187
98-05
1st Edition
2nd Edition Fly leaf
Addition of comment
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS deleated
Page i, ii, iii deleated
3rd item on NOTE
i to viii
5-4
Select ∆ SP setting→Select θ setting
Pare of explanation changed
Pare of Lise changed
5-20
5-27
6-6
6-7, 6-8
Drawing and explanation replaced
Explanation Handling Precautions
(unit:%C)→(unit:%)
7-6
Section of "PA40 Settings and descriptions"
-1000 to +1000 SPU(CH2)→
-1000 to +1000 PVU(CH1)
7-8
Section of "PA100 Settings and descriptions"
Addition of %
7-15
Section of Event type 89 Meaning Message"
Segment number binary SEG-BIN→
Segment number binary code SEG-BIN
Section of "C76 Settings and descriptions"
Addition of explanation
Explanation of "Io required in connecting one
PGM"
the figure on the right,→the figure below
7-29
7-35
8-19
11-5
"
"and " " replaced in the character Lise
Section of "Memory card Parameter"
Fixed command control data→
Constant value control data
11-6
•Ambient humidity range
0 to 90% RH→10 to 90% RH
•Vibration resistance Addition of explanation
Parameter Work Section of "PA40 Settings and descriptions"
Sheet P.2
-1000 to +1000 SPU(CH2)→
-1000 to +1000 PVU(CH1)
98-11
00-11
3rd Edition 4-3
8-1
Compensating lead wire specifications was deleted
NOTE was changed (CP-SP-1002E was abolished)
The table of Key test(00-01) was changed
Figure of Table 12-9 was added
12-8
12-12
12-17
Fig12-6, 12-7 was changed
4th Edition 1-5
"D0" of Additional processing item was deleted
Wirining diagram of RS-232C connection was
changed
4-16
4-17
5-10
5-11 to 5-36
HONEYWELL
JIS code of NOTE table was deleted
Diagram of other functions was added
Old 5-10 to 5-35 pages
Company name and Adress of JAPAN were
SERVICE CENTERS changed
01-12
5th Edition
fonts changed
4-16
The 2nd item of "Handling Precautions",
'There are four (RD, SD, SG and FG) • • •' →
'There are three (RD, SD and SG) • • •' changed
and the 3rd item of "Handling Precautions"
deleted
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printed Manual Number
Date
Edition
Revised pages
Description
01-12 EN1I-6187
5th Edition 5-10
Diagrams of PV1-PV2 differential upper limit,
PV1-PV2 differential lower limit,
PV1-PV2 differential upper limit during automatic
PV channel selection and PV1-PV2 differential
upper limit during automatic PV channel selection
deleted
7-29
7-35
7-36
9-9
No.90 Unused→PID type changed
deleted, old 7-36 page
Old 7-37 page
Set up data C91→C90 changed
The 3rd item of "Handling Precautions" changed
10-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HONEYWELL SERVICE CENTERS
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
HONEYWELL BV
HONEYWELL A/S
Askerveien 61
PO Box 263
Laaderhoogtweg 18
NL-1101 EA AMSTERDAM ZO
THE NETHERLANDS
Tel.:31 20 56 56 911
N-1371 ASKER
NORWAY
Tel.:47 66 90 20 30
POLAND
HONEYWELL Ltd
UI Augustowka 3
PL-02981 WARSAW
POLAND
PORTUGAL
HONEYWELL PORTUGAL LDA
Edificio Suecia II
Av.do Forte nr 3-Piso 3
CARNAXIDE
Tel.:48 2 642 25 70
2795 LINDA A VELHA
PORTUGAL
Tel.:351 4172 602
REPUBLIC OF IRELAND
HONEYWELL
Unit 5
Long Mile Road
DUBLIN 12
Republic of Ireland
Tel.:353 1 565944
REP.OF SINGAPORE
HONEYWELL PTE LTD.
BLOCK 750E CHAI CHEE ROAD
06-01 CHAI CHEE IND.PARK
1646 SINGAPORE
RUSSIA
REP OF SINGAPORE
Tel.:65 449 7609
HONEYWELL INC
Tryokhprundny Pereulok 11.13
SU 10 3001 MOSCOW
Tel.:7095 29 92 531
SLOVAK REPUBLIC
HONEYWELL
Trnavska 3
831 04 BRATISLAVA
SLOVAKIA
SOUTH AFRICA
HONEYWELL LTD
34 Harry Street
Tel.:42 7 601 23
Robertsham
J OHANNESBURG 2001
REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA
Tel.:27 11 680 3440
SPAIN
HONEYWELL
J osefa Valcarcel, 24
PO Box 29106
28080 MADRID
SPAIN
SWEDEN
HONEYWELL A.B.
Storsatragrand 5
S-127 86 STOCKHOLM
SWEDEN
Tel.:34 1 32 02 112
SWITZERLAND
HONEYWELL A.G.
Hertistrasse 2
Tel.:46 8 775 55 00
UNITED KINGDOM
HONEYWELL HOUSE
Charles Square
8304 WALLISELLEN
SWITZERLAND
Tel.:41 1 839 2525
BRACKNELL, BERKS. RG12 1EB
UNITED KINGDOM
Tel.:44 344 424 555
U.S.A
HONEYWELL INC
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS DIV.
1100 VIRGINIA DRIVE
PA 19034-3260 FT.WASHINGTON
U.S.A
VENEZUELA
HONEYWELL CA
APARTADO 61314
1060 CARACAS
VENEZUELA
Tel.:215 641 3000
Tel.:58 2 239 7533
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HONEYWELL SERVICE CENTERS
ARGENTINA
ASIA PACIFIC
HONEYWELL ASIA PACIFIC Inc.
Room 3213-3225
HONEYWELL S.A.I.C.
BELGRANO 1156
BUENOS AIRES
ARGENTINA
Sun Kung Kai Centre
No 30 Harbour Road
WANCHAI
Tel.:54 1 383 9290
HONG KONG
Tel.:852 829 82 98
AUSTRALIA
HONEYWELL LIMITED
5 Thomas Holt Drive
North Ryde Sydney
NSW AUSTRALIA 2113
Tel.:61 2 353 7000
AUSTRIA
HONEYWELL AUSTRIA G.m.b.H.
Handelskai 388
A1020 VIENNA
AUSTRIA
BELGIUM
Tel.:43 1 213 300
HONEYWELL S.A.
Avenue de Schipol, 3
1140 BRUSSELS
BELGIUM
BRAZIL
HONEYWELL DO BRAZIL AND CIA
Rua J ose Alves Da Chunha
Lima 172
Tel.:32 2 728 27 11
BUTANTA
05360 SAO PAULO SP
BRAZIL
CANADA
HONEYWELL LIMITED
THE HONEYWEEL CENTRE
155 GORDON BAKER RD
M2H 3N7 NORTH YORK, ONTARIO
CANADA
Tel.:55 11 819 3755
CZECHIA
HONEYWELL PRAGUE
Krocinovska 3
Tel.:416 499 6111
CS16000 PRAGUE 6
CZECHIA
Tel.:422 243 10 754
DENMARK
HONEYWELL A/S
Lyngby Hovedgade 98
2800 LYNGBY
FINLAND
DENMARK
Tel.:45 45 93 56 56
HONEYWELL OY
Ruukintie 8
SF-02320 ESPOO
FINLAND
Tel.:358 0 80101
FRANCE
HONEYWELL S.A.
4, Avenue Ampere
MONTIGNY LE BRETONNEUX
F-78886 ST QUENTIN EN YVELINES
FRANCE
GERMANY
HONEYWELL AG
Kaiserleistrasse 39
Postfach 10 08 65
D-63067 OFFENBACH/MAIN
GERMANY
Tel.:(1) 30 58 80 00
HUNGARY
HONEYWELL Kft
Volgy U 30
Tel.:49 69 80 640
H-1026 BUDAPEST
HUNGARY
Tel.:36 1 116 76 59
ITALY
HONEYWELL S.p.A.
Via Vittor Pisani, 13
20124 MILANO
ITALY
JAPAN
HONEYWELL KK
14-6, Shibaura 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 150-0023
J apan
Tel.:39 2 67 731
MEXICO
HONEYWELL S.A.DE CV
AV. CONSTITUYENTES 900
COL. LOMAS ALTAS
11950 MEXICO CITY
MEXICO
Tel.:81-3-5440-1395
Tel.:52 5 259 1966
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. CP-UM-5025E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|